Monarch Wise3000

User Guide
Tomorrow Series
Integrated Elevator Control Cabinet
User Guide
A00
Data code 19011423
Preface
Preface
Thank you for purchasing the Tomorrow series integrated elevator control cabinet.
This product is a new generation of elevator control cabinet independently designed

and produced by Inovance. It shows excellent performance due to the use of two 32-
bit processors. Adopting the new structure, the control cabinet achieves a beautiful
appearance, proper component layout, and the use of more environmentally friendly
materials. It can drive both the AC asynchronous motor and permanent-magnet
synchronous motor (PMSM), guaranteeing safety and reliability and saving energy.
Additionally, this product requires less traveling cables and offers fixed user interfaces,
facilitating product use and repair.
This guide describes the types and features, safety information, installation and
electrical design, and maintenance of the control cabinet. Read this guide carefully
before using the product, and keep it properly for future maintenance reference.
Precautions
◆◆ For illustration purpose, the drawings in this guide are sometimes shown without
covers or protective guards. Remember to install the covers or protective guards as
specified before using the product, and perform operations following the instructions.
◆◆ The drawings in this guide are for illustration only. Actual products may vary.
◆◆ The instructions are subject to change, without notice, due to product upgrade,
specification modification as well as efforts to increase the accuracy and convenience
of the guide.
◆◆ Contact the customer service center of Inovance if you have any problems during use.
-1-
Contents
Contents
Preface.................................................................................................................................... 1
Revision History..................................................................................................................... 7
Introduction........................................................................................................................... 8
Safety Instructions............................................................................................................... 15
1 Product Information......................................................................................................... 21
1.1 Model Number and Nameplate............................................................................. 21
1.2 Layout of Components.......................................................................................... 22
1.3 Dimensions............................................................................................................. 24
1.4 Technical Data........................................................................................................ 26
1.5 Electrical Specifications......................................................................................... 29
1.6 Introduction to Major Components...................................................................... 29
1.6.1 Braking Resistor......................................................................................... 29
1.6.2 WISE3000-U Series Power Module............................................................ 30
1.6.3 Main Control Board.................................................................................... 31
1.6.4 ADO Board.................................................................................................. 32
1.6.5 PG Card....................................................................................................... 38
1.6.6 Brake Power Supply Board........................................................................ 39
1.6.7 Electric Brake Release Device.................................................................... 40
2 Mechanical Installation.................................................................................................... 43
2.1 Preparations for Installation.................................................................................. 43
2.1.1 Installation Environment Requirements.................................................. 43
2.1.2 Installation Space Requirements.............................................................. 43
2.2 Installation Guidance............................................................................................. 45
2.2.1 MR Control Cabinet.................................................................................... 45
2.2.2 MRL Control Cabinet.................................................................................. 46
2.2.3 Installing the Braking Resistor Box........................................................... 47
2.2.4 Installing the Intercom............................................................................... 50
2.2.5 Joining the MR Control Cabinet and the MRL Module............................ 51
2.2.6 Installing Slow-Down Switches................................................................. 52
-2-
Contents
3 Electrical Installation........................................................................................................ 54
3.1 External Interfaces in the Control Cabinet............................................................ 54
3.1.1 Locations of External Interfaces................................................................ 55
3.1.2 Main Circuit Terminals............................................................................... 56
3.1.3 Control Signal Terminals........................................................................... 58
3.1.4 MCB Terminals............................................................................................ 60
3.1.5 Grounding System...................................................................................... 69
3.1.6 PG Card Wiring............................................................................................ 70
3.2 Wiring of External Interfaces.................................................................................. 72
3.3 Recommended Peripherals................................................................................... 73
3.4 Major Electrical Circuits......................................................................................... 73
3.4.1 Main Circuit................................................................................................. 73
3.4.2 Safety and Door Lock Circuits................................................................... 74
3.4.3 Inspection and EEO Circuits...................................................................... 75
3.4.4 Bypass Circuit............................................................................................. 76
3.4.5 Brake Circuit............................................................................................... 77
3.4.6 ARD Circuit.................................................................................................. 78
3.4.7 Leveling Signal System Circuit.................................................................. 78
3.5 Overall System Wiring............................................................................................ 79
4 Commissioning Tools....................................................................................................... 80
4.1 Keypad.................................................................................................................... 80
4.2 LED Operating Panel.............................................................................................. 82
4.2.1 Keys............................................................................................................. 82
4.2.2 Indicators.................................................................................................... 83
4.2.3 Data Display................................................................................................ 84
4.2.4 Basic Operations........................................................................................ 84
5 System Commissioning.................................................................................................... 86
5.1 Trial Run Commissioning Flowchart..................................................................... 86
5.2 Safety and Circuit Inspections............................................................................... 86
5.3 Power-on and Controller State Confirmation...................................................... 89
5.3.1 Checking the Power-on State.................................................................... 89
-3-
Contents
5.3.2 Checking the Controller State at Normal Power-on................................ 89
5.3.3 Possible Controller States and Troubleshooting Before Commissioning.90
5.4 Commissioning at Inspection Speed.................................................................... 91
5.4.1 Motor Auto-Tuning..................................................................................... 93
5.4.2 Running Test at Inspection Speed.......................................................... 101
5.5 Shaft Auto-Tuning................................................................................................. 103
5.6 Function Commissioning..................................................................................... 106
5.6.1 UCMP Function......................................................................................... 106
5.6.2 Braking Force Detection.......................................................................... 108
6 Parameter Description................................................................................................... 111
6.1 Keypad Parameters.............................................................................................. 111
6.2 Operating Panel Parameters................................................................................ 115
6.3 Parameter Groups................................................................................................ 115
6.4 Parameter Table................................................................................................... 116
Group F0: Basic parameters............................................................................. 116
Group F1: Motor Parameters............................................................................ 118
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters.............................................................. 122
Group F3: Running Control Parameters.......................................................... 125
Group F4: Floor Parameters............................................................................. 130
Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters....................................................... 132
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters.............................................................. 145
Group F7: Test Function Parameters............................................................... 159
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters..................................................... 161
Group F9: Time Parameters.............................................................................. 163
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters............................................................ 165
Group Fb: Door Function Parameters.............................................................. 176
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters.................................................... 178
Group Fd: Communication Parameters........................................................... 181
Group FE: Elevator Function Setting Parameters........................................... 182
Group FF: Factory Parameters (Reserved)....................................................... 186
Group FJ: Factory Parameters (Reserved)....................................................... 186
-4-
Contents
Group FP: User Parameters.............................................................................. 186
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters.................................................... 186
Groups E0 to E9: Fault Record Parameters...................................................... 188
7 Troubleshooting............................................................................................................. 193
7.1 Fault Levels........................................................................................................... 193
7.2 Fault Information and Solutions......................................................................... 194
8 Maintenance................................................................................................................... 229
8.1 Daily Inspection.................................................................................................... 229
8.1.1 Inspection Items....................................................................................... 230
8.1.2 Cleaning Items.......................................................................................... 230
8.2 Periodic Maintenance.......................................................................................... 230
8.2.1 Inspection Items....................................................................................... 230
8.2.2 Replacement of Quick-Wear Parts.......................................................... 231
9 Options and Customization........................................................................................... 234
9.1 List of Options....................................................................................................... 234
9.2 Function Introduction of Options....................................................................... 236
9.2.1 4G IoT Module (WL415-DB/IoT-WL435D)................................................ 237
9.2.2 10-Channel I/O Expansion Board (MCTC-KZ-G1).................................... 242
9.2.3 Customized Box........................................................................................ 246
10 Functions and Solutions.............................................................................................. 247
10.1 Attendant Function............................................................................................ 247
10.2 Fire Emergency Function................................................................................... 249
10.3 Elevator Lock Function...................................................................................... 252
10.4 Overload/Full-Load Function............................................................................ 254
10.5 Time-based Floor/Door Service........................................................................ 259
10.6 Running Tests..................................................................................................... 260
10.7 Anti-Nuisance Function..................................................................................... 265
10.8 Accessibility Function........................................................................................ 266
10.9 VIP Running Function......................................................................................... 269
10.10 Braking Force Detection Function................................................................... 272
10.11 Automatic Emergency Evacuation at Power Failure...................................... 275
-5-
Contents
10.12 Parallel/Group Control..................................................................................... 277
10.12.1 Parallel Control..................................................................................... 277
10.12.2 Group Control....................................................................................... 280
10.13 Through-type Door Solution........................................................................... 282
11 Appendix....................................................................................................................... 286
11.1 Electrical Schematic Diagrams.......................................................................... 286
11.2 Warranty Agreement.......................................................................................... 286
-6-
Revision History
Revision History
Date Version Change Description
January 2021 A00 First release.
-7-
Introduction
Introduction
1 Connection of Peripherals
External LED
Intercom operating panel
Three-phase AC power supply Fire control switch

T ON
S
R
N
PE OFF
Hand wheel Fire emergency output
Overspeed governor
Motor over-temperature feedback
Brake
Brake feedback
power
supply
output Encoder feedback
Car top junction box
Car
Car traveling cable
Hall call display
Door lock feedback
Shaft
Slow-down switches
U V WPE
Final limit switches
Shaft lighting
Pit inspection box
Pit
Pit stop box
Figure 1 Connections between the control cabinet and peripherals
◆◆ Figure 1 briefly shows the connections between the control cabinet and
its peripherals.
◆◆ Inovance provides some of the peripherals. Contact our sales personnel if

NOTE
you have any needs.
-8-
Introduction
2 List of basic functions
Function Description
Common Running Functions
When the car door or landing door opens, the system detects its
Detection of door
operations. If a car/landing door fault is detected, the elevator
circuit faults
stops running.
In the automatic running or attendant state, this function enables

Full collective the elevator to respond to both car calls and hall calls. Passengers
selective at any service floor can call the elevator by pressing the up call
button or down call button.
The system automatically judges the door open state (door open
Door open time at calls/commands, door open for protection, and delayed door
setting open) and determines the corresponding door open holding time
according to the settings.
In the automatic running state, you can hold down the door open
Door open holding button in the car to postpone the door close so that goods can be
moved in or out.
Service floor setting

You can set the service floors of each door operator as required.
for door operators
Advance door closing During door open holding in the automatic running state, you can
(ADC) using the door close the door in advance by pressing the door close button to
close button improve the efficiency.
The system supports the display of floor numbers in combinations

Floor number display
of numbers and letters, which meets the requirements of special
setting
conditions.
If the car door is blocked by stuff during door close, the light
Light curtain signal
curtains operate and the elevator opens the door. This function is
judgment
inactive in the fire emergency state.
Independent control
When the elevator has two car doors, automatic control on the
of the front and rear
two doors can be implemented as required.
doors
After the door close maintains for a certain period, if the door lock
Repeated door close is still open, the elevator automatically opens the doors and then
closes the doors again.
During running, the elevator automatically announces such

Voice announcement
information as the running direction and the next arriving floor.
-9-
Introduction
In the automatic running state, the elevator automatically returns

Idle elevator returning
to the set parking floor and waits for passengers if it does not
to main floor
receive any car calls or hall calls within the set time.
If the door open time exceeds the door open protection time but
Landing at another the door open limit signal is still inactive, the elevator closes the
floor doors and automatically runs to the next landing. The system
reports Err55.
Cancellation of wrong Passengers can cancel a wrong car call by double-pressing the
calls corresponding floor button in the car.
You can enable or disable the system service for one or more
Service floor setting
floors as required.
You are allowed to set the time range and service floors of time-
Service floor selection based floor services or select the service floors using the service
floor switchover switch.
The elevator does not respond to any call, and the elevator doors
Independent running need to be closed manually. In the case of group control, the
elevator runs independently out of the group control system.
After the elevator enters the attendant state, the running of the
Attendant running
elevator is controlled by the attendant.
When the elevator is in the non-inspection state and stops in

the non-leveling zone, the elevator automatically runs to the
Low-speed self-rescue
leveling zone at a low speed and opens the doors if the safety
requirements are met.
Before running, the system automatically implements the startup

Automatic startup
torque compensation based on the current car load to achieve a
torque compensation
smooth startup, improving the riding comfort.
The system automatically computes and generates the running

Direct travel ride curves based on the distance, which enables the elevator to
directly stop at the leveling position without creeping.
Service suspension When the elevator cannot respond to hall calls, the corresponding
signal output terminal outputs a service suspension signal.
Running times In the automatic running state, the system automatically records
recording the running times of the elevator.
Running time The system automatically records the accumulative working hours
recording and days of the elevator.
- 10 -
Introduction
If the system detects a door lock circuit abnormality during door

Automatic door
open/close, the elevator automatically re-opens/re-closes the
open upon door lock
doors and reports a fault after the set door open/close times is
abnormality
reached.
When the elevator is waiting at the leveling position, if there is a

call or door open command from the car operating panel (COP)
Disability service
for the disabled at this floor, the door open holding time will be
prolonged.
When the car is fully loaded in the automatic running state, the
elevator does not respond to hall calls from passing floors. These
Direct travel ride with
hall calls, however, can still be registered. They will be executed
full-load
during the next running (in the case of single elevator) or by other
elevators (in the case of parallel/group control).
When the car load exceeds the rated elevator load, the elevator
Overload protection
alarms and stops running.
The system automatically records the detailed fault information,

Fault data recording
improving the efficiency of maintenance.
Inspection-related Functions
Commissioning personnel can let the elevator enter the inspection

Bypass running state by operating the bypass plug and start running to maintain
the landing/car door lock.
Simple maintenance The 3-button keypad on the main control board (MCB) allows the
keypad commissioning of running floors, door open/close, and so on.
After the elevator enters the inspection state, the system cancels
automatic running and automatic door operations. You can press
Inspection running
the up (down) button to make the elevator run at the inspection
speed.
With a simple parameter setting, the system can obtain the motor
Motor auto-tuning
parameters no matter whether the motor carries a load or not.
Every time the elevator runs to the terminal floors, the system
Intelligent floor automatically checks and corrects the car position based on slow-
position correction down switch 1, and eliminates top-hitting or bottom-clashing with
the assistance of the slow-down system.
- 11 -
Introduction
Considering the inaccurate running control at a high inspection

Dual-speed for speed and too long running time at a low inspection speed, the
inspection system provides the dual-speed curve for inspection. This greatly
improves the running efficiency during inspection.
The running tests include the fatigue test of a new elevator, car
call floor test, hall call floor test, hall call response forbidden, door
Running tests
open/close forbidden, limit switches shielded, overload signal
shielded, and so on.
Fire Emergency and Safety Functions
After receiving a fire emergency signal, the elevator does not

Fire emergency
respond to any call but returns to the fire emergency floor and
landing
waits.
After the elevator enters the firefighter operation mode, door

open/close is controlled by the door open/close button (optional)
Firefighter operation
rather than automatically. The elevator responds only to car calls
and only one car call can be registered every time.
After the security floor function is enabled, the security floor

remains active from 22:00 to 06:00 (24-hour clock). During this
Security floor period, the elevator goes to the security floor, stops, and opens
the doors, before moving to the destination floor every time. This
enhances safety.
In the automatic running state, when the elevator lock switch

operates or the set lock time is reached, the elevator clears all the
Elevator lock
calls registered, returns to the elevator lock floor, stops running,
and turns off the lighting and fan in the car.
The system automatically identifies power failure and outputs

Automatic
a signal to the relay to which emergency evacuation automatic
identification of
switchover function is allocated to implement emergency
power failure
evacuation at power failure.
After detecting a position abnormality, the system runs the

Main floor verification elevator to each floor until reaching the terminal floor for
verification, guaranteeing the system's safety.
When the earthquake detection device operates and inputs a

signal to the system, the elevator lands at the nearest floor and
Earthquake function
stops running. It restores normal running only after the earthquake
signal becomes inactive and the fault is reset manually.
- 12 -
Introduction
Energy-saving Functions
If the system does not receive a running command within the set
Car energy saving time, it automatically cuts off the power supplies of the lighting
and fan in the car.
Arrival gong disabled This function allows the elevator to cancel the arrival gong
at night announcement within the set time range.
After the car lighting is turned off, the system stops outputting the
Energy saving of idle
door close command to reduce the power consumed by the door
door operator
operator.
- 13 -
Introduction
3 List of other functions
Function Description Remarks
When stopping at a landing, the elevator

may move upward or downward due to the
load change. It will cause that the car sill is
not aligned with the landing sill, which is MCTC-SCB
Micro-leveling
inconvenient for passengers and goods to required
get in and out. In this case, the system allows
the elevator with doors open to run to the
leveling position at the re-leveling speed.
For elevators configured with an emergency

Emergency
power supply, the system uses this power MCTC-ARD-C
evacuation at power
supply to implement low-speed self-rescue at required
failure
power failure.
In the automatic running state, when the

elevator speed is smaller than 0.2 m/s during
stop and the door zone signal is active, the
Advance door MCTC-SCB
system shorts the door lock through the
opening (ADO) required
shorting door lock circuit relay and outputs a
door open signal in advance. This maximizes
the elevator use efficiency.
Passengers need to use the IC card to go to

IC card IC card required
floors that require authorization.
The system supports the parallel control of

Parallel control two elevators, meeting the requirements of -
different customers.
The system automatically judges the number

of passengers in the car and the number of
car calls registered. If too many car calls are
Anti-nuisance registered, the system determines that a -
nuisance exists and cancels all car calls. In
this case, passengers need to register the car
calls correctly again.
- 14 -
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions
Safety Precautions
1) Before using the product, read the safety instructions thoroughly and comply with
them during operations.
2) To ensure the safety of humans and equipment, follow the signs on the product and
all the safety instructions in this guide.
3) "CAUTION", "WARNING", and "DANGER" items in this guide do not indicate all safety
precautions that need to be followed; instead, they just supplement the safety
precautions.
4) Use this product according to the designated environmental requirements. Damage

caused by improper usage is not covered by warranty.
5) Inovance shall take no responsibility for any personal injuries or property damage
caused by improper usage.
Safety Levels and Definitions
indicates that failure to comply with the notice will result in severe
DANGER
personal injuries or even death.
indicates that failure to comply with the notice may result in severe
WARNING
personal injuries or even death.
indicates that failure to comply with the notice may result in minor
CAUTION
personal injuries or damage to the equipment.
- 15 -
Safety Instructions
Safety Instructions
Power-on
DANGER
◆◆ Before power-on, make sure that the equipment is installed properly with reliable
wiring and the motor can be restarted.
◆◆ Before power-on, make sure that the power supply meets equipment requirements to
prevent equipment damage or even a fire.
◆◆ At power-on, unexpected operations may be triggered on the equipment. Therefore,

stay away from the equipment.
◆◆ After power-on, do not open the cabinet door and protective cover of the equipment.
Failure to comply will result in an electric shock.
◆◆ Do not touch any wiring terminals at power-on. Failure to comply will result in an
electric shock.
◆◆ Do not remove any part of the equipment at power-on. Failure to comply will result in
an electric shock.
Operation
DANGER
◆◆ Do not touch any wiring terminals during operation. Failure to comply will result in an
electric shock.
◆◆ Do not remove any part of the equipment during operation. Failure to comply will result
in an electric shock.
◆◆ Do not touch the equipment shell, fan, or resistor for temperature detection. Failure to
comply will result in heat injuries.
◆◆ Signal detection must be performed by only professionals during operation. Failure to

comply will result in personal injuries or equipment damage.
WARNING
◆◆ Prevent metal or other objects from falling into the device during operation. Failure to
comply may result in equipment damage.
◆◆ Do not start or stop the equipment using the contactor. Failure to comply may result in
equipment damage.
- 16 -
Safety Instructions
Maintenance
DANGER
◆◆ Equipment installation, wiring, maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be

performed by only professionals.
◆◆ Do not maintain the equipment at power-on. Failure to comply will result in an electric
shock.
◆◆ Before maintenance, cut off all equipment power supplies and wait at least 10 minutes.
WARNING
◆◆ Perform daily and periodic inspection and maintenance for the equipment according to
maintenance requirements and keep a maintenance record.
Repair
DANGER
◆◆ Equipment installation, wiring, maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be

performed by only professionals.
◆◆ Do not repair the equipment at power-on. Failure to comply will result in an electric
shock.
◆◆ Before inspection and repair, cut off all equipment power supplies and wait at least 10
minutes.
WARNING
◆◆ Require repair services according to the product warranty agreement.
◆◆ When the equipment is faulty or damaged, require professionals to perform

troubleshooting and repair by following repair instructions and keep a repair record.
◆◆ Replace quick-wear parts of the equipment according to the replacement guide.
◆◆ Do not operate damaged equipment. Failure to comply may result in worse damage.
◆◆ After the equipment is replaced, perform wiring inspection and parameter settings
again.
- 17 -
Safety Instructions
Disposal
WARNING
◆◆ Dispose of retired equipment by following local regulations or standards. Failure to

comply may result in property damage, personal injuries, or even death.
◆◆ Recycle retired equipment by following industry waste disposal standards to avoid

environmental pollution.
Other Instructions
1) Requirements for the main air switch
Install a circuit breaker on the front-end of the power supply of the control cabinet to
prevent such faults as short circuit and overload on the back-end load. For a three-
phase 380 V system, it is recommended to install a circuit breaker, whose rated current
is above the rated input current of the control cabinet, on the front-end of the input
power supply (R, S, T, N).
2) Requirements for the residual current device (RCD)
Install an RCD with rated tripping current not higher than 30 mA in the car top lighting
and shaft lighting circuits for protection.
3) High leakage current warning
The control cabinet generates high leakage current during running. Ground the control
cabinet reliably before connecting it to the input power supply. Grounding must comply
with local regulations and related IEC standards.
4) Motor insulation test
Perform the insulation test when the motor is used for the first time, after long-time
storage, or in a regular inspection, to prevent damage to the control cabinet caused
by the poor insulation of motor windings. The motor must be disconnected from the
control cabinet during the insulation test. A 500 V megger is recommended for the test.
Ensure that the measured insulation resistance is 5 MΩ or above.
5) Motor thermal protection
If the rated capacity of the motor selected does not match that of the control cabinet,
especially when the rated power of the control cabinet is greater than that of the motor,
adjust the motor protection parameters or install a thermal relay for the motor for
- 18 -
Safety Instructions
protection.
6) Disposal
The electrolytic capacitors inside the control cabinet and on the PCBs may explode
when they are burnt. Poisonous gas is generated when the plastic parts are burnt. Treat
them as industrial waste.
7) Inspection of peripheral cables
Ensure the cross sectional area and voltage resistance of power cables and control
power cables meet the requirements. Route the input cables and output cables
separately to avoid cable mixing and danger caused by insulation damage.
Run the signal cables and power cables separately. Use shielded twisted pairs (STPs) as
analog signal cables, and ensure that the shielded cables are reliably grounded at one
end.
Safety Signs
For safe equipment operations and maintenance, comply with the safety signs on
the equipment, and do not damage or remove the safety labels. The following table
describes the safety signs.
Safety Sign Description
◆◆ Tip hazard!
◆◆ Only professionals are allowed to open the

cabinet door.
- 19 -
Safety Instructions
Safety Sign Description
◆◆ Before maintenance, cut off all power supplies

and wait at least 10 minutes.
◆◆ Before using the product, read the user guide

and safety instructions carefully.
◆◆ High voltage!
◆◆ High temperature!
◆◆ Do not touch!
- 20 -
1 Product Information
1.1 Model Number and Nameplate

WISE3000 - B - 4 017 - A
Tomorrow series Code Motor Type

A Asynchronous motor
Code Type of Control Cabinet B Synchronous motor
B Machine room (MR)
W Machine room-less (MRL) Code Power Rating
008 8.3 kW
Code Voltage Class 017 17 kW
4 Three-phase 380 V
Figure 1-1 Model number
Table 1-1 Description of the model number
Model Number Type of Control Cabinet Power Rating Motor Type Mounting Mode
Synchronous
WISE3000-B-4008-B MR 8.3 kW Backplate mounting
motor
Asynchronous
WISE3000-B-4017-A MR 17 kW Backplate mounting
motor
Synchronous
WISE3000-B-4017-B MR 17 kW Backplate mounting
motor
Synchronous Wall-embedded
WISE3000-W-4008-B MRL 8.3 kW
motor mounting
Synchronous Wall-embedded
WISE3000-W-4017-B MRL 17 kW
motor mounting
◆◆ This part only describes the model number of standard products. If you have any
customized requirements, contact the sales personnel of Inovance.
NOTE
Figure 1-2 Nameplate

- 21 -
1.2 Layout of Components
Layout of the top layer Layout of the bottom layer
②
③
⑨
④
⑤
⑥
⑦ ⑩
Figure 1-3 Components of the MR control cabinet
Table 1-2 Description of components of the MR control cabinet
No. Component No. Component

① Braking resistor box ⑧ MCB
② ADO board ⑨ Brake power supply board
③ Stop button ⑩ Power module
Emergency electrical operation
④ ⑪ Control transformer
(EEO) switch
⑤ RUN button Shorting motor stator contactor
⑥ Intercom ⑫ Brake contactor
⑦ PG card RUN contactor
- 22 -
②
③
④
⑤
⑬
⑭
⑮
⑯
⑰
⑱
⑲
⑳
Figure 1-4 Components of the MRL control cabinet
- 23 -
Table 1-3 Description of components of the MRL control cabinet
a Braking resistor box o Main circuit incoming terminal
Residual current device (RCD) for

ADO board
shaft lighting
b p
c Stop button q RCD for car top fan and lighting
Main air switch in the main power

EEO switch
supply circuit
d r
e RUN button s 2P air switch
g PG card t Inspection socket
h MCB u Control cabinet lighting
i Control transformer v Electric brake release
Shorting motor stator contactor w MRL button board
Reserved position for the

Brake contactor
residential monitoring board
j x
RUN contactor y Intercom
Reserved position for the protocol

Power cable hole
conversion board
m z
Reserved position for the I/O

Signal cable hole
expansion board
n ヒ
1.3 Dimensions
H1
W D W1 D1
Figure 1-5 Dimensions diagram - MR control cabinet
- 24 -
H1
W1 D1
W D
Figure 1-6 Dimensions diagram - MRL control cabinet
Table 1-4 Dimensions of the control cabinet and resistor box
Model of Control Dimensions of Control Cabinet Dimensions of Resistor Box

Cabinet (W x D x H, unit: mm) (W1 x D1 x H1, unit: mm)
WISE3000-B-4008-B 230 x 190 x 900 230 x 180 x 408
WISE3000-B-4017-A 230 x 190 x 900 230 x 180 x 408
WISE3000-B-4017-B 230 x 190 x 900 230 x 180 x 408
WISE3000-W-4008-B 230 x 190 x 1730 230 x 180 x 408
WISE3000-W-4017-B 230 x 190 x 1730 230 x 180 x 408
◆◆ The dimensions provided in the preceding table only apply to standard

control cabinets.
NOTE ◆◆ The resistor box for MR control cabinets must be installed on the car top.
- 25 -
1.4 Technical Data
Table 1-5 Main technical data of the control cabinet
Item Specification
Maximum
99 Hz
frequency
Carrier frequency 0.5–12 kHz, adjusted automatically based on load features
Motor control mode Sensorless vector control (SVC)/Feedback vector control (FVC)
Startup torque 0.5 Hz/180 % (SVC); 0 Hz/200 % (FVC)
1:1000 (FVC)
Speed range 1:100 (SVC)
1:50 (V/f control)
Speed stability
±0.5% (SVC) ±0.05% (FVC)
accuracy
Torque control
±5% (FVC)
accuracy
40s for 150% of the rated current; 10s for 200% of the rated
Overload capacity
current
Motor auto-tuning
With-load auto-tuning; No-load auto-tuning
mode
Direct travel ride mode in which the leveling position can be
Basic specification
Distance control
adjusted flexibly
Acceleration/
Automatic generation of multiple curves
Deceleration curve
Slow-down function Automatically identifies the position of slow-down brackets
Shaft auto-tuning Accurately records the shaft position in the form of 32-bit data
Leveling
Flexible and easy-to-use leveling adjustment function
adjustment
Startup torque Load cell pre-torque compensation or automatic pre-torque
compensation compensation without a load cell
Real-time clock Accurate RTC allows time-based floor service, peak service, and
(RTC) automatic password.
Test function Implements a variety of commissioning easily.
Fault protection Handles elevator faults based on the fault level.
Intelligent Implements such functions as remote monitoring, user
management management, and elevator dispatch in group control.
Safety checks at Performs safety checks on peripherals at power-on, such as
power-on grounding and short circuit.
Monitors the elevator state based on feedback signals to ensure
State monitoring
proper running of the elevator.
- 26 -
Item Specification
Power cable Control cabinet three-phase input terminals: R, S, T (N)
terminals Motor power cable input terminals: U, V, W
Input/Output (I/O)
Include machine room safety plug-in terminals, brake plug-in

Signal cable terminals, traveling cable terminals, shaft cable terminals, car
terminals top lighting power supply terminals, backup I/O terminals, and
backup communication terminals.
PG card interface Connected to the encoder cable.
Cabinet panel Equipped with the emergency stop button, EEO switch, and UP,
(MR control cabinet) DOWN and RUN buttons.
Cabinet panel Equipped with the shaft lighting switch, overspeed governor
Operation and commissioning
(MRL control reset button, electric brake release button, and backup power
cabinet) supply switch.
3-digit LED display, implementing certain commissioning
Keypad
functions
5-digit LED display, enabling the query and modification of
LED operating panel
most parameters and the monitoring of system state
Views and modifies all parameters, uploads or downloads
Mobile phone APP parameters, and monitors various system state parameters and
running curves.
The AC drive in the control cabinet provides the phase loss
Phase loss detection function. If input phase loss occurs in the power grid,
protection the control system reports a phase loss fault and stops the
elevator, preventing accidents.
Connect the peripheral grounding cable to the grounding
Grounding copper busbar in the control cabinet to ensure that the control
protection cabinet and the ground have the same electromotive force,
Protection function
avoiding electric shock.

If the transformer temperature rises due to too long system
operating time or other reasons, the system automatically
Over-temperature
becomes disconnected when the transformer temperature
protection
exceeds 105ºC. When the transformer temperature falls to
below 70ºC, the system restores operation.
Heatsink over-
Protected by the thermistor.
temperature
Short circuit Protects the drive controller when overcurrent occurs due to a
protection short circuit between any two phases on the output side.
- 27 -
Item Specification
When the encoder feedback speed exceeds the limit or the
deviation between the torque limit and the test speed feedback
Speed abnormality
is too large, the system will immediately perform protection,
protection
generate an alarm, and prohibit running, achieving quick
protection against abnormal elevator speed.
The system performs protection immediately to prevent
Rotary encoder
accidents when any of the following rotary encoder
abnormality
abnormalities occurs: phase loss, rotation in reverse direction,
protection
Protection function
disconnection, and pulse interference.

Leveling switches are abnormal when they fail or are stuck. The
Leveling switch
system judges whether any abnormality exists according to the
abnormality
change of feedback leveling signals. If the leveling signals have
protection
no change in the set time, the system will generate an alarm.
The system obtains the floor information through shaft auto-
tuning. If the floor data is abnormal, the system reports the
Floor data fault during first-time running after power-on. During actual
abnormality running, the system continuously compares the position
protection information input by signals with the stored floor data. If the
deviation between them is too large, the system generates an
alarm.
1000 m or below, de-rated by 1% for each 100 m higher if the
Altitude altitude is above 1000 m
Maximum altitude: 3000 m
-10ºC to +45ºC, with the rated current de-rated by 1.5% for each
Ambient 1ºC higher if the ambient temperature is above 40℃
temperature Maximum temperature: +45℃
Temperature variation: < 0.5 ºC/min
Humidity Below 95% RH, without condensation
Vibration Below 5.9 m/s2 (0.6 g)
Environment
For a MR control cabinet, the net height of the working area in

Height
the machine room must be at least 2.5 m.
Working area in
For inspection and repair, reserve a 0.5 m x 0.7 m space in front
front of the control
of the control cabinet.
cabinet
Storage
-20ºC to +55ºC
temperature
Pollution degree PD2
IP rating IP20
Applicable power TN/TT (For an IT grid, remove the VDR screw used for
distribution system connecting the PE terminal.)
- 28 -
1.5 Electrical Specifications

1) Safety circuit power supply: 125 VAC, 0.5 A
2) System 24 V power supply: 24 VDC, 5 A
3) Brake power supply output: 110 VDC, 4 A
4) Control power supply of the overspeed governor coil: 220 VAC
Table 1-6 Electrical specifications of the control cabinet
Model of Control Cabinet Voltage Class Rated Power Braking Resistor

Power: 2.5 kW
WISE3000-B-4008-A 380 VAC 8.3 kW
Resistance: 70 Ω
Power: 2.5 kW
WISE3000-B-4008-B 380 VAC 8.3 kW
Resistance: 70 Ω
Power: 4.5 kW
WISE3000-B-4017-A 380 VAC 17 kW
Resistance: 40 Ω
Power: 4.5 kW
WISE3000-B-4017-B 380 VAC 17 kW
Resistance: 40 Ω
Power: 2.5 kW
WISE3000-W-4008-B 380 VAC 8.3 kW
Resistance: 70 Ω
Power: 4.5 kW
WISE3000-W-4017-B 380 VAC 17 kW
Resistance: 40 Ω
1.6 Introduction to Major Components
1.6.1 Braking Resistor
All models of the control cabinet are equipped with a built-in braking unit and a braking
resistor installed in the resistor box.
Figure 1-7 Braking resistor box
- 29 -
Select a proper braking resistor according to the following table.
Table 1-7 Model selection of the braking resistor
Max. Braking Resistor

Model of Control Braking Model of Braking
Output Power
Cabinet Max. Min. Unit Resistor
Power
WISE3000-B-4008-A 8.3 kW 85 Ω 65 Ω 2.5 kW
MCTC-PB4008-1.5m
WISE3000-B-4008-B 8.3 kW 85 Ω 65 Ω 2.5 kW
WISE3000-B-4017-A 17 kW 43 Ω 35 Ω 4.5 kW
Built-in MCTC-PB4017-1.5m
WISE3000-B-4017-B 17 kW 43 Ω 35 Ω 4.5 kW
WISE3000-W-4008-B 8.3 kW 85 Ω 65 Ω 2.5 kW MCTC-PB4008-3m
WISE3000-W-4017-B 17 kW 43 Ω 35 Ω 4.5 kW MCTC-PB4017-3m
◆◆ If the braking resistor needs to be replaced, contact Inovance or your

supplier.
NOTE
1.6.2 WISE3000-U Series Power Module
The power module is the core of an elevator drive control system. It integrates the
functions of both elevator controller and high-performance vector AC drive.
Figure 1-8 WISE3000-U series power module
- 30 -
Table 1-8 Models of the power module
Model Number Description
WISE3000-U-4008-A4 8.3 kW power module, works with MCTC-SCB-A4
WISE3000-U-4008-D4 8.3 kW power module, works with MCTC-SCB-D4
WISE3000-U-4017-A4 17 kW power module, works with MCTC-SCB-A4
WISE3000-U-4017-D4 17 kW power module, works with MCTC-SCB-D4
Select a proper model based on the motor power, input/output current, and power
capacity. Detailed parameter information is as follows.
Table 1-9 Power module–related parameters
Power Capacity (kVA) Input Current (A) Output Current (A) Applicable Motor (kW)
11.0 26 20 8.3
21.0 46 35 17
◆◆ The WISE3000-U power module also applies to the WISE3000-W series

MRL control cabinet.
NOTE
1.6.3 Main Control Board
The control cabinet provides fixed interfaces, facilitating the wiring and reducing the
number of cables required. For details about the indicators and terminals on the MCB,
see "3.1.4 MCB Terminals" on Page 66 .
Figure 1-9 Main control board (MCTC-MCB-E2)
- 31 -
1.6.4 ADO Board
The control cabinet is supplied with an ADO board (MCTC-SCB-A4 for elevators with
synchronous motor and MCTC-SCB-D4 for elevators with asynchronous motor or
through-type door).
This board is used to implement the following functions:
① Re-leveling: When stopping at a landing, the elevator may move upward or

downward due to the elastic deformation of steel ropes or other factors. It is
inconvenient for passengers and goods to get in and out. With the ADO board
(MCTC-SCB-A4/MCTC-SCB-D4), the system allows the elevator with doors open to
automatically move to the leveling position at the re-leveling speed, eliminating the
safety risks caused by the deviation between the car door sill and the landing door
sill.
② ADO: In the automatic running state, when the elevator speed decreases to the
allowable range during stop and the door zone signal is active, the ADO board
(MCTC-SCB-A4/MCTC-SCB-D4) shorts the door lock by controlling the safety relay to
open the elevator doors in advance, improving the running efficiency.
③ Door lock shorting detection: During door open upon arrival, the control system
together with the ADO board (MCTC-SCB-A4/MCTC-SCB-D4) identifies whether the
door lock is shorted by shorting the door lock and performing segmented door lock
detection. This eliminates the safety risks caused by the door lock contact fault or by
manual door lock shorting.
④ UCMP test and stopping component triggering: When the car stops in the door
zone with doors open, if an abnormal car movement occurs, the ADO board outputs
a control signal to trigger the stopping components (such as the auxiliary brake)
to stop the car after the corresponding door zone switch becomes inactive. This
guarantees the safety of passengers in the car.
MCTC-SCB-A4 (ADO board for elevators with synchronous motor)
ERROR ERROR
K5L
K6L CAN CAN
K3L K1L K1L
K2L MCU K2L MCU
K4L
FL1 FL2 FL1 FL2
CN2 CN1 CN2
Figure 1-10 MCTC-SCB-A4
- 32 -
① Indicators
FL1 Up door zone signal indicator
FL2 Down door zone signal indicator
K1L K1 relay action indicator
Slow flashing: an interval of 3s, program in operating, CAN communication not

CAN established
Fast flashing: an interval of 500 ms, CAN communication established
ERROR Fault indicator
② Terminal description
Terminal Pin Function Description
CN1 SO1 Door lock shorting output 1

SO5 SO1 SO2
SO6 SO3 SO4 SO2 Door lock shorting output 2
FL1 Up door zone signal
FL2 Down door zone signal
CN2 24V Power supply (+)

CAN- CAN+ GND 24V FL2 FL1
GND Power supply (-)
CAN+ CAN communication (+)
CAN- CAN communication (-)
- 33 -
③ Wiring diagram
End of safety circuit End of door lock circuit

Front car Front hall
3 SO1
4 SO2
CN1
MCTC-SCB-A4
Up door zone signal
1 FL1
3 FL2 Down door zone signal
5 24V 24V
6 GND GND
MCB
7 CAN+ CAN+
8 CAN- CAN-
CN2
Figure 1-1 Wiring of the MCTC-SCB-A4
MCTC-SCB-D4 (ADO board for elevators with asynchronous motor or through-type

door)
ERROR
K5L
K6L CAN
K3L K1L
K2L MCU
K4L
FL1 FL2
CN1 CN2 CN1
Figure 1-12 MCTC-SCB-D4
① Indicators
FL1 Up door zone signal indicator
FL2 Down door zone signal indicator
- 34 -
Slow flashing: an interval of 3s, program in operating, CAN communication

CAN not established
Fast flashing: an interval of 500 ms, CAN communication established
ERROR Fault indicator
② Terminal description
Terminal Pin Function Description
SO5 Auxiliary brake output 1
SO1 Door lock shorting output 1

CN1
SO5 SO1 SO2
SO6 SO3 SO4 SO6 Auxiliary brake output 2
FL1 Up door zone signal
FL2 Down door zone signal
CN2 24V Power supply (+)

CAN- CAN+ GND 24V FL2 FL1
GND Power supply (-)
CAN+ CAN communication (+)
CAN- CAN communication (-)
③ Wiring diagram
End of safety circuit End of door lock circuit

Front car Front hall
1 SO5 Rear Rear

car hall
3 SO1 Auxiliary
4 SO2 brake
5 SO6
7 SO3
8 SO4
CN1
MCTC-SCB-D4
Up door zone signal
1 FL1
3 FL2 Down door zone signal
5 24V 24V
6 GND GND
MCB
7 CAN+ CAN+
8 CAN- CAN-
CN2
Figure 1-13 Wiring of the MCTC-SCB-D4
- 35 -
Installation of switches
When the ADO, re-leveling, and UCMP functions are enabled, four switches are required:
① up leveling switch
② up door zone switch (FL1)
③ down door zone switch (FL2)
④ down leveling switch
◆◆ Install the four switches listed above in the correct sequence. Otherwise,
the elevator will run in the reverse direction during re-leveling or ADO.
NOTE
Solution of switches
① Four switches are required.
② Main functions of the up and down door zone switches:
When the ADO or re-leveling function is enabled, the two door zone switches are
used for door zone signal detection. If any one of them detaches from the leveling
plate, it indicates that the car has moved to the non-door zone.
When the UCMP function is enabled, the two door zone switches are used
for UCMP detection. If any one of them detaches from the leveling plate, it is
considered that UCMP occurs.
③ The up and down door zone switches must be normally open (NO) switches.
)盍NN
Up leveling switch
Leveling plate
Up door zone switch

Leveling plate ≤ 300 mm
)NN
Down door zone switch
Down leveling switch

)盍NN
Figure 1-14 Recommended installation of switches
- 36 -
Distance requirements:
1) H1 ≤ 20 mm
2) H2 = 60 mm
The leveling plate length cannot exceed 300 mm. The recommended length is 300
mm.
Two door zone switches are required. The length of leveling plates is determined by
the actual door open area (door vane length) of the elevator.
Parameter settings
This section takes the Tomorrow series control cabinet as an example.
Four switches:
Up leveling signal — NO or NC
Up door zone signal (FL1) — must be NO
Down door zone signal (FL2) — must be NO
Down leveling signal — NO or NC
◆◆ Output specifications of leveling switches: 24 V voltage, min. 70 mA output

current
NOTE
Processing method:
Connect the up and down door zone switches to X1 and X3 on the MCB
respectively, and connect the up and down door zone switches to FL1 and FL2 on
the ADO board respectively.
During up running, when the system detects the up leveling signal, FL1 signal,
and FL2 signal, it automatically processes the signals to implement ADO.
During down running, when the system detects the down leveling signal, FL1
signal, and FL2 signal, it automatically processes the signals to implement ADO.
Related parameter setting:
Set Bit1 of F6-52 (Function selection) to 1.
- 37 -
1.6.5 PG Card
The controller in all models of the control cabinet is equipped with a PG card to
implement the FVC. According to the type of external motors, different types of PG
card will be configured (MCTC-PG-E for synchronous motor and MCTC-PG-A2 for
asynchronous motor). You can also select other PG cards according to the encoder
used.
Table 1-10 Model selection of the MCTC-PG card
Encoder Type Applicable PG Card Appearance
Incremental push-pull/open-
MCTC-PG-A2
PGB
MCTC-PG-A2
PGA
collector output encoder

J1 CN1 PGM
12V
D2
MCTC-PG-D
D5
D8
UVW encoder MCTC-PG-D

D11
J1 D14 CN1
M AI
CN2
Sin/Cos encoder MCTC-PG-E J1 MCTC-PG-E CN1
Absolute encoder
MCTC-PG-F1 MCTC -PG -F1
(ECN413/1313)
J1 CN1
Table 1-11 Pin assignment of the CN1 terminal on different PG cards
Pin
Pin No. MCTC-PG-A2
Assignment
1 12V
12V
2 PGM PGM
3 PGA PGA
PGB
4 PGB
- 38 -
Pin
Pin No. MCTC-PG-D MCTC-PG-E MCTC-PG-F1
Assignment
1 A+ B- B-
2 A- - -
3 B+ Z+ -
4 B- Z- -
5 - A+ A+
6 - A- A-
7 U+ COM GND 1
6
7
11
8 U- B+ B+
2 12
8
3 13
9
4 14
9 V+ VCC 5V (UP)
10
5 15
10 V- C+ CLK+
11 W+ C- CLK-
12 W- D+ DATA+
13 VCC D- DATA-
14 COM - -
15 - - 5V (Sensor)
1.6.6 Brake Power Supply Board
The brake is powered by the brake power supply board in the control cabinet. The
standard brake voltage is 110 VDC.
The following figure shows the brake power supply board.
S1 J4
S2 J5
J1
J2 J3
Figure 1-15 Brake power supply board (MCTC-PCB-C1)
- 39 -
Table 1-12 Description of terminals on the brake power supply board
Terminal Function Max. Current Operating Voltage
5 A (continuous
J1 24 VDC control circuit power supply -
operating)
J2 220 VAC input power supply 6A -
110 VDC and 220 VAC output brake

J3 6 A (startup) 4 A (operating)
power supply
Same as the 24
J4/J5 Fan output terminal -
VDC current
Brake output operating voltage

S1/S2 - -
selection terminal
Adjust the output voltage of the brake power supply using jumper caps.
① 110 VDC, no voltage drop (no jumper cap for both S1 and S2)
② 110 VDC at startup (3s), 90 VDC during operating (no jumper cap for S1, pins 2 and 3
of S2 shorted)
③ 110 VDC at startup (3s), 80 VDC during operating (no jumper cap for S1, pins 1 and 2
of S2 shorted)
④ 110 VDC at startup (3s), 60 VDC during operating (no jumper cap for S2, pins 2 and 3
of S1 shorted)
⑤ 110 VDC at startup (3s), 48 VDC during operating (no jumper cap for S2, pins 1 and 2
of S1 shorted)
◆◆ Brake startup current: ≤ 6 A; Brake operating current: ≤ 4 A
◆◆ Default settings: 110 VDC at startup (3s), 90 VDC during operating

NOTE
1.6.7 Electric Brake Release Device
The electric brake release device (MCTC-ERB-A1) is a standard accessory of the control
cabinet. It is used for the electric brake release operations when the mains electricity
fails. When the mains electricity is normal, it charges the batteries. When the mains
electricity fails, implement the electric brake release by operating the buttons on this
device. If the elevator is in the non-door zone, press the Start and Common buttons
simultaneously to release the brake. If the elevator is in the door zone, press the Forced
and Common buttons simultaneously to release the brake.
- 40 -
① ⑦
② ⑥
③ ⑤
④
Figure 1-16 Electric brake release device (MCTC-ERB-A1)
① Status indicators ⑤ Door zone door lock terminal
② Operating buttons ⑥ Programming terminal
③ Electric brake release device ⑦ Mains electricity input terminal
④ Brake release voltage output terminal
Table 1-13 Description of terminals on the electric brake release device
Terminal Terminal
Type Mark
L 220 VAC input

220 VAC input -
N 220 VAC input
Brake release ZQ1+ Brake release voltage (+)

voltage -
ZQ2- Brake release voltage (-)
output
24V 24 V output (+) The 24 V output only powers up

the external door zone switch
24 V output
COM 24 V output (-) equipped for the electric brake
release device.
Active high input side of An external door zone switch is

MQ+
door zone signal required. Do not connect these
Door zone terminals to the door zone signal
Active low input side
signal input in the safety circuit in series.
MQ- of door zone signal,
Only supports active high door
connected to COM
zone switch.
MS+ Door lock signal input (+) An external door lock switch is
Door lock required. If the door lock switch is
signal input MS- Door lock signal input (-) not used, short MS+ and MS- (door
lock is closed by default).
- 41 -
The following figure shows the wiring of the electric brake release device. Connect the
terminal BA on the MCB to electric brake release terminal ⑤ (MS+/MS-).
Terminal BA on the MCB
Electric brake release terminal ⑤ (MS+/MS-)
Figure 1-17 Wiring between the electric brake release device and the MRL control cabinet
The cable connecting the electric brake release device and the MR control cabinet is
routed in from the bottom of the control cabinet.
- 42 -
2 Mechanical Installation
2.1 Preparations for Installation
◆◆ Before installation, prepare ten M8 expansion bolts yourself.

NOTE
2.1.1 Installation Environment Requirements
For details about the installation environment, see "Table 1-5 Main technical data of the
control cabinet" on Page 22 .
2.1.2 Installation Space Requirements
For the dimensions and baseplate installation of the control cabinet, see related
drawings in the delivered technical documents. Install all cabinets according to the
drawings. Allow sufficient spacing around the cabinets for proper ventilation, maximum
door swing, and maintenance. Provide a passageway for entering the installation
foundation and reserve sufficient space for the auxiliary equipment used to transport
the AC drive.
MR control cabinet
Backplate mounting is recommended for the MR control cabinet. In this mode, the
distance between the cabinet bottom and the ground must be at least 400 mm. In
normal conditions, the cabinet back faces the shaft. The height of the room in which
the cabinet is installed must be at least 2500 mm and exceeds that of the cabinet. The
allowed minimum distance between the cabinet front and the wall is 700 mm. There are
no special requirements for the distance between the two sides of the cabinet and the
wall, but make sure that the cabinet can be placed in the room smoothly.
100-200 Shaft
≥ 2500
≥ 700
≥ 400
Figure 2-1 Installation space requirements for the MR control cabinet (unit: mm)
- 43 -
◆◆ The space requirements apply to backplate mounting rather than floor-

standing mounting.
NOTE
MRL control cabinet
Wall-embedded floor-standing mounting is recommended for the MRL control cabinet.

The cabinet back faces the shaft. The height of the room in which the cabinet is installed
must be at least 2500 mm and exceeds that of the cabinet. It is recommended that the
cabinet be installed 300 to 400 mm above the waterproof steps. The allowed minimum
distance between the cabinet front and the wall is 700 mm. There are no special
requirements for the distance between the two sides of the cabinet and the wall, but
make sure that the cabinet can be placed in the room smoothly.
Shaft
Back
MRL installation
Protrudes from the wall by 15 mm
≥ 0 Front ≥ 0
Shaft
≥ 2500
≥ 700
300-400
Figure 2-2 Installation space requirements for the MRL control cabinet (unit: mm)
- 44 -
2.2 Installation Guidance
2.2.1 MR Control Cabinet
The MR control cabinet is fixed on the wall through the backplate. Before installation,
prepare the required expansion screws and open the cabinet door.
There is one mounting hole in the upper part of the cabinet back and two mounting
holes in the lower part. Their locations and dimensions are shown in the following
figure.
Ø10
898
Ø10
160
Figure 2-3 Locations and dimensions of the mounting holes on the back of the MR control
cabinet (unit: mm)
Fix the control cabinet on the wall using three M8 expansion bolts.
- 45 -
The following figure shows the mounting of the MR control cabinet.
Upper mounting hole

M8 expansion bolt x 1
Lower mounting holes

Figure 2-4 Installation of the MR control cabinet
◆◆ Install the control cabinet on the wall close to the motor.

NOTE
2.2.2 MRL Control Cabinet
The MRL control cabinet is embedded in the wall in the method of floor-standing
mounting.
There are four mounting holes at the bottom of the control cabinet, whose locations
and dimensions are shown in the following figure.
100
4-∅10
170
Figure 2-5 Locations and dimensions of the mounting holes at the bottom of the MRL
control cabinet (unit: mm)
- 46 -
As shown in the following figure, four M8 expansion bolts are used to fix the control
cabinet.
Figure 2-6 Installation of the MRL control cabinet
2.2.3 Installing the Braking Resistor Box
CAUTION
◆◆ The box temperature can reach 180℃ when the braking resistor box
is operating.
◆◆ The surface of the wall on which the braking resistor box is fixed must
be high-temperature-resistant.
◆◆ Do not touch the braking resistor box during operating or before the
box cools down. Otherwise, a burn will occur.
Due to the height limit, the braking resistor box must be installed on the wall separately
from the control cabinet.
- 47 -
The following figure shows the installation and wiring of the braking resistor box.
100-200
Figure 2-7 Installation and wiring of the braking resistor box (unit: mm)
- 48 -
There is one mounting hole in the upper part of the back of the braking resistor box and
two mounting holes in the lower part Their locations and dimensions are as follows.
∅9
390
∅9
180
Figure 2-8 Locations and dimensions of the mounting holes on the braking resistor box
(unit: mm)
As shown in the following figure, fix the braking resistor box vertically on the wall using
three M8 expansion bolts.
Wall
Figure 2-9 Installation of the braking resistor box
◆◆ Install the braking resistor box of the MRL control cabinet in a site near the
control cabinet in the shaft. The location depends on you.
◆◆ The braking resistor box is equipped with a resistor cable (1.5 m for the MR
control cabinet and 3 m for the MRL control cabinet).
◆◆ After the installation is complete, connect the resistor cable to terminals
NOTE
PB and + on the controller. You can determine the wiring mode yourself
based on the working condition. Contact the technicians of Inovance if
you have any questions.
- 49 -
Threaded hole for the

braking resistor cable
Figure 2-10 Threaded hole on the top of the sheet metal enclosure of the MR control
cabinet to pass the braking resistor cable through
2.2.4 Installing the Intercom
1 MR control cabinet
Install the intercom as follows:
1) Tighten the screw and nut on the intercom onto the mounting hole on the left side of
the MR control cabinet.
2) Insert the intercom cable into the control cabinet through the grommet and connect
it to the corresponding terminal.
3) Reset the handset on the cradle.
Mounting hole for

intercom screw
Grommet for the

intercom cable
Figure 2-11 Installing the intercom in the MR control cabinet
- 50 -
2 MRL control cabinet

Install the intercom as follows:
1) Tighten the screw and nut on the intercom onto the mounting hole on the right side
of the MRL control cabinet.
2) Connect the intercom cable to the corresponding terminal.
3) Reset the handset on the cradle.
Mounting hole for

intercom screw
Figure 2-12 Installing the intercom in the MRL control cabinet
◆◆ Before embedding the control cabinet in the wall, install the intercom in
the cabinet.
NOTE
2.2.5 Joining the MR Control Cabinet and the MRL Module
Follow the steps below to join the MR control cabinet and the MRL module.
① Join the MR control cabinet, MRL module, and air filter cover together using ten
M5x12 SEMS screws.
② Pass the MRL module cable through the threaded hole on the joint and connect it to
the corresponding terminal.
③ Install the light of the MR control cabinet in the location shown in the following
figure.
- 51 -
Air filter cover
Light
MR control cabinet
MRL module
Figure 2-13 Joining the MR control cabinet and the MRL module
2.2.6 Installing Slow-Down Switches
The slow-down switch is one of the key means to guarantee the elevator's safety. When
the elevator runs at the maximum speed, it prevents top-hitting or bottom-clashing if
the elevator position becomes abnormal. The control cabinet supports a maximum of
three pairs of slow-down switches. The slow-down switches 1, slow-down switches 2,
and slow-down switches 3 are installed from the two ends of the shaft to intermediate
floors one by one. Generally, low-speed elevators require only one pair of slow-down
switches, while high-speed elevators require two or three pairs of slow-down switches.
- 52 -
The slow-down distance L indicates the distance between the up/down slow-down
switch and the leveling plate of the top/bottom terminal floor. It is calculated as follows:
V2
L>
2 x F3-08
L: Slow-down distance; V: Rated elevator speed (F0-04); F3-08: Special deceleration rate
The default value of F3-08 (Special deceleration rate) is 0.9 m/s2. The following table
lists the slow-down distances at different rated elevator speeds.
Table 2-1 Slow-down distances at different rated elevator speeds
Rated
Elevator 0.25 0.4 0.5 0.63 0.75 1 1.5 1.6 1.75 2 2.5 3 3.5 4
Speed (m/s)
Slow-down 1
0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.4 0.7 1.5 1.7 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0 2.0
distance (m)
Slow-down 2
No No No No No No No No No 2.5 4.0 4.0 4.0 4.0
distance (m)
Slow-down 3
No No No No No No No No No No No 6 8 11
distance (m)
Notes:
① V < 1 m/s: Compared with the values recommended in this table, the actual installation
distances of slow-down switches are allowed to have an error of ±0.1 m.
② 1 m/s ≤ V ≤ 2 m/s: Compared with the values recommended in this table, the actual
installation distances of slow-down switches are allowed to have an error of ±0.2 m.
③ 2 m/s < V ≤ 4 m/s: Compared with the values recommended in this table, the actual
installation distances of slow-down switches are allowed to have an error of ±0.3 m.
◆◆ The slow-down distances listed in the preceding table are calculated at

the default special deceleration rate (0.9 m/s2).
◆◆ Decreasing the acceleration/deceleration rate and increasing the

special deceleration rate does not affect the elevator's safety. However,
NOTE decreasing the special deceleration rate may cause safety hazards. If
a modification is required, calculate the proper slow-down distance
according to the preceding formula.
- 53 -
3 Electrical Installation
Each elevator must be separately equipped with a main switch which can cut off all
the power supply circuits, an RCD with 30 mA leakage current which can cut off the car
lighting and socket power supplies, and an RCD with 30 mA leakage current which can
cut off the shaft lighting power supply.
CAUTION
◆◆ All the peripheral cables must be prepared.
◆◆ Ensure that the cross sectional area and voltage withstanding

capacity of power cables and control power input cables meet the
requirements.
◆◆ Route the input cables and output cables separately to avoid cable
mixing and danger caused by insulation damage.
◆◆ Route the signal cables and power cables separately. Use shielded
twisted pairs (STPs) as analog signal cables, and ensure that the
shielded cables are reliably grounded at one end.
◆◆ Do not leave shorting cables or iron scraps in the control cabinet.

Failure to comply may cause danger.
3.1 External Interfaces in the Control Cabinet

This section mainly introduces the major external interfaces in the control cabinet.
Prepare the peripheral cables according to the schematic diagrams. Before wiring, make
preparations following the descriptions in this section. Visit Inovance's official website
(www.inovance.com) to download the Electrical Schematic Diagrams of Tomorrow
Series Integrated Elevator Control Cabinet .
The external interfaces in the control cabinet include main circuit I/O terminals, MCB
terminals, grounding hole, and PG card port.
- 54 -
3.1.1 Locations of External Interfaces
MCB
Control signal terminals
Main circuit cable inlet area
Main circuit cable outlet area
Grounding area
Figure 3-1 Locations of external interfaces in the MR control cabinet
MCB
Communication encoder socket
Grounding area
Figure 3-2 Locations of external interfaces in the MRL control cabinet
- 55 -
3.1.2 Main Circuit Terminals
The main circuit input terminals on the driver board of the MR control cabinet are
onboard screw-clamping terminals connected to the power input cables.
N R S T (+) (-) PB U V W
Figure 3-3 Main circuit input terminals of the MR control cabinet
The main circuit input terminals on the driver board of the MRL control cabinet are DIN
rail spring-clamping terminals connected to the power input cables.
L1 L2 L3 N
Figure 3-4 Main circuit input terminals of the MRL control cabinet
◆◆ If a synchronous motor is used, contactor accessory extension terminals

are provided and the output (motor) cables are connected to the RUN
contactor accessory terminals.
◆◆ If an asynchronous motor is used, there are no contactor accessory

NOTE
extension terminals and the output (motor) cables are connected to the
output side of the RUN contactor.
Main circuit output cables (UVW)

Shorting motor stator cable
Figure 3-5 Main circuit output terminals
- 56 -
N, R, S, and T are power input terminals of the control cabinet, and SW:2, SW:4, and
SW:6 are output terminals.
◆◆ The shorting motor stator contactor (FX) is configured only for

synchronous motor.
NOTE
Table 3-1 Description of main circuit terminals
Mark Function
(N), R, S, T Three-phase power input terminals; N: neutral terminal
SW:2, SW:4, SW:6 Control cabinet output terminals, connected to the motor
Wiring of the main circuit
Three-phase AC power supply
N R S T (+) (-) PB U V W
Motor
Figure 3-6 Wiring of the main circuit of the MR control cabinet
Three-phase AC power supply
L1 L2 L3 N Motor
Figure 3-7 Wiring of the main circuit of the MRL control cabinet
- 57 -
◆◆ During installation, ensure the proper phase sequence of main circuit

cables and correct input/output cables. Otherwise, the control cabinet
cannot operate properly.
NOTE ◆◆ During wiring, connect the neutral wire (N) to the control cabinet.
Otherwise, the control cabinet cannot operate properly.
3.1.3 Control Signal Terminals
MR control cabinet
Except for the main circuit terminals and PG card port, all the signal terminals of the MR
control cabinet are located on the MCB.
MRL control cabinet
Compared with the MR control cabinet, the MRL control cabinet is added with an
operating switch board. This board integrates the overspeed governor function buttons,
a 12 V power failure emergency switch, and a shaft lighting switch.
LIHS1 OS_1
807 809 802 203 212 205 212
① ②
③ ④
⑤
212 211 301 302 301 302 +12V
802 801 302 FL1 FL1 T01
K1 K2 K3
Figure 3-8 Operating switch board in the MRL control cabinet
Table 3-2 Description of control signal terminals
Terminal Pin No. Function Description of Each Pin
807 220 V shaft lighting - L

LIHS1 807 809 802 809 220 V shaft lighting - L
802 220 V shaft lighting - N
203 220 V overspeed governor remote action - L

212 220 V overspeed governor remote action - N
OS_1 203 212 205 212
205 220 V overspeed governor remote release - L
212 220 V overspeed governor remote release - N
- 58 -
212 220 V overspeed governor power supply - N

212 211 211 220 V overspeed governor power supply - L
K1
802 801 801 220 V shaft lighting power supply - L
802 220 V shaft lighting power supply - N
301 24 V power supply +

301 302 302 24 V power supply -
K2
302 FL1 302 24 V power supply -
FL1 Up re-leveling signal - X1

302 24 V power supply -
301 302 +12V
K3 +12V 12 V standby power input
FL1 302 T01
FL1 Up re-leveling signal - X1
T01 Intercom power supply +
Table 3-3 Description of switches and buttons
No. Component Function
Shaft lighting
① Controls the shaft lighting, single pole double throw (SPDT)
switch
12 VDC emergency power supply switch in the MRL control

Standby power
② cabinet, used to provide the MCB with 12 VDC power at power
supply switch
failure to light up LEDs
Overspeed
Common button used for overspeed governor test and related
③ governor
operations
common
Overspeed
④ Overspeed governor reset button
governor reset
Overspeed
⑤ Overspeed governor action key
governor test
◆◆ Perform the overspeed governor test by pressing buttons ③ and ⑤

simultaneously.
◆◆ Reset the overspeed governor by pressing buttons ③ and ④

NOTE
simultaneously.
- 59 -
3.1.4 MCB Terminals
The MCB (MCTC-MCB-E2) is a standard component of the control cabinet. Molex solder
terminal blocks and screw-type plug-in terminals are used as user and backup terminals
respectively to minimize the number of cables and simplify user operations.
MOD2, COP, HOP, CAN2, 232

K13 K14
X1 J10
to
X24 J9
PD CN8
UP
RUN CN7
DOWN
Y1 to Y6
X25
to
X28
Shorting socket used for CN3
UCMP test, customized short- J1
J13
ing terminal; pull out this ter- J14
J5
minal to switch between the J6
door lock circuit and auxiliary 123 121 111
door lock circuit.
Wiring area Traveling
K4 K5 K7 K8 K10 K11 BA BB BC
cable area
K1 AA
K2
AB
BD
K3 BE
MT
HW
OS
K6 K9 K12 POW1
Shaft cable area
Figure 3-9 Arrangement of indicators and terminals on the MCB
- 60 -
Table 3-4 Description of indicators on the MCB
Mark Indicator Function Description
Modbus2 Flashes when communication between the MCB and

MOD2 communication the IoT or residential/remote monitoring board is
indicator normal.
CAN1
Flashes when communication between the MCB and
COP communication
the CTB is normal.
indicator
Modbus1
Flashes when communication between the MCB and
HOP communication
the HCB is normal.
indicator
Group control Steady ON when communication for parallel/group

CAN2 communication control is normal and flashes when the running
indicator under parallel/group control is normal.
Serial Flashes when communication between the MCB and

232 communication the host controller or residential/remote monitoring
indicator board is normal.
Lights up when the corresponding external input

X1 to X28 Input signal indicator
signal is active.
Output signal
Y1 to Y6 Lights up when the system has an output.
indicator
24 V system power
PD Lights up when the 24 V system power fails.
failure indicator
Indicator for
111 segments 101 to 111 Steady ON when the safety circuit is normal.
of the safety circuit
Indicator for
Indicator for
- 61 -
Table 3-5 Description of control circuit terminals on the MCB
Mark Type Terminal Name Function
Commissioning
RS232 communication
CN8 USB interface interface via mobile
interface
phone bluetooth
Operating panel Connects the operating

CN7 RJ45 interface
interface panel.
CN3 PG card connection interface
Used by the manufacturer only, optional grounding terminal for AIs, shorted
J1
to COM by default
J5 Used by the manufacturer only, Modbus2 communication termination

J6 resistor, shorted to ON by default
J13 Used by the manufacturer only, CAN2 communication termination resistor,

J14 shorted to ON by default
Used by the manufacturer only. Do not short these terminals randomly.

J9/J10
Otherwise, the control cabinet may not work properly.
Table 3-6 Pin assignment of MCB terminals used as external interfaces
502 220 V car lighting power supply - L

507 220 V car lighting power supply - N
507 502
202 220 V door operator power supply - N
AA PE Grounding
(Traveling cable 133 134 207 220 V door operator power supply - L
terminal) 131A 123 130 110 V safety circuit end signal
Plug type: 15110027
130 125 131A 110 V front car door lock end signal
Socket - 4.2 mm - Double
row - 2x8P - Wire end - PE 132 132 110 V front landing door lock end signal
5566 series (RoHS)
123 110 V car top safety signal
125 110 V EEO signal
207 202
133 110 V car door lock safety signal
134 110 V car top safety signal
- 62 -
SGC1 Auxiliary car door lock 1

SGC2 Auxiliary car door lock 2
FL1 DZI 302 24 V power supply -
AB CAN- R CAN+ CAN +
(Traveling cable CAN- CAN -
CAN+ L
terminal) FL1 Up leveling signal - X1
Plug type: 15110030 302 DC12
FL2 Down leveling signal - X3
Socket - 4.2 mm - Double 301 FL2
row - 2x7P - White - 9A DZI Door zone signal - X2
(RoHS) SGC2 DC12 Intercom signal - 12 V +
SGC1 102 B01 Intercom signal - 12 V -
L Intercom signal -
R Intercom signal +
102 Safety circuit - neutral wire
Shaft/Pit safety circuit start point

111
Shaft/Pit safety circuit end point
BA 121
131 133 Pit shorting point under EEO
(Shaft safety cable) 118
121 132 Landing door lock circuit start point
Plug type: 15110026 131
Socket - 4.2 mm - Double 118 132 Front landing door lock circuit end point
132
row - 2x4P - White - 9A Rear landing door lock circuit end point
PE 111
(RoHS) 133
Grounding cable connected to the safety
PE
circuit
BB
(Pit intercom 301 24 V power supply +
terminal) 302 MOD- 302 12/24 VDC power supply common terminal
Plug type: 15110032
301 MOD+ MOD+ Modbus signal +
row - 2x2P - White - 9A MOD- Modbus signal -
(RoHS)
BC
(Hall call
R Intercom signal +
communication
terminal) L DC12 L Intercom signal -
Plug type: 15110032 R 302 DC12 Intercom power supply +
Socket - 4.2 mm - Double 302 24 V power supply -
row - 2x2P - White - 9A
(RoHS)
- 63 -

BD
(Up slow-down 301 24 V power supply +
switch terminal) 302 ULS2 302 24 V power supply -
Plug type: 15110032
301 ULS1 ULS2 Up slow-down 1 signal input- X14
row - 2x2P - White - 9A ULS1 Up slow-down 2 signal input- X16
(RoHS)
BE
(Down slow-down 301 24 V power supply +
switch terminal) 302 DLS2 302 24 V power supply -
Plug type: 15110032
301 DLS1 DLS2 Down slow-down 1 signal input - X15
row - 2x2P - White - 9A DLS1 Down slow-down 2 signal input - X17
(RoHS)
ZQ1+ Output brake power supply +

MT ZQ1+ ZQ2- ZQ2- Output brake power supply -
(Motor brake signal
terminal)
Plug type: 15110046 X20 301 X18 Brake travel switch 1 detection input
Socket - 4.2 mm - Double X22 301 X22 Brake travel switch 2 detection input
row - 2x5P - Plug - White
-5566 series (RoHS) X18 301 X20 Motor over-temperature protection
detection input
HW
(Hand wheel
110 110 Hand wheel switch start point
terminal)
Plug type: 15110028 111 111 Hand wheel switch end point
Socket - 4.2 mm - Double PE PE Safety circuit grounding
(RoHS)
OS
(Overspeed governor
121 121 Overspeed governor switch start point
switch terminal)
Plug type: 15110028 122 122 Overspeed governor switch end point
Socket - 4.2 mm - Double PE PE Grounding
(RoHS)
POW1
(Mains electricity
input terminal) 502 Mains electricity - N
Plug type: 15110047 501 502
501 Mains electricity - L
(RoHS)
- 64 -

K7
(Machine room 302 302 24 V power supply -
intercom) DC12 DC12 12 V intercom signal +
Plug type: 15020317
R R Intercom signal +
Terminal block - Plug-in
- Plug - Screw-type - 3.81 L L Intercom signal -
mm - 04P - Green (RoHS)
X2 X2 Door zone signal input

X5 Light-load
X5
301
X12 Up limit/Overload
X12
X13 Down limit/Full-load
K8 X13 301 24 V power supply +
(Backup DI terminal)
301 X19 Shorting door lock circuit relay feedback
Plug type: 15020011
Terminal block - Plug-in X19 signal
- Plug - Screw-type - 3.81 X21 Fire emergency input
X21
301
X23 Emergency evacuation signal input at
X23
power failure
301
X24 X24 Main air switch/Brake contactor 2 feedback
K9
ARD emergency evacuation output control
(Y6 output)
Y6 Y6 at power failure
Plug type: 15020286
Terminal block - Plug-in M6 M6 Common terminal of ARD emergency
- Plug - Screw-type - 3.81 evacuation at power failure
CAN-
CAN- Reserved
CAN+
K10 CAN+ Reserved
(Communication 302 302 External power ground
terminal) CAN2- CAN2- Parallel/Group control
Plug type: 15020151
CAN2+ CAN2+ Parallel/Group control
Terminal block - Plug-in
- Plug - Screw-type - 3.81 302 302 External power ground
mm - 08P - Green (RoHS) MOD2- IoT
MOD2-
MOD2+ IoT
MOD2+
- 65 -
AI-M AI-M Common terminal of AIs

K11 Ai
Ai Analog input
(Backup DO) Y4 Fire emergency output
Y4
Plug type: 15020026 M4 Common terminal of fire emergency
Terminal block - Plug-in M4
- Plug - Screw-type - 3.81 output
Y5
mm - 06P - Green (RoHS) Y5 Backup output
M5 M5 Backup output common terminal
K12
(Auxiliary brake SGC3 Auxiliary brake control signal output 2
SGC3
control signal) SGC2 Auxiliary brake control signal output 1
Plug type: 15020336 SGC2
ZQ1+ Output brake power supply +
Terminal block - Plug-in ZQ1+
- Plug - Screw-type - 3.81 ZQ1- Output brake power supply -
mm - 05P - Green (RoHS) ZQ1-
Table 3-7 Pin assignment of MCB terminals used as internal interfaces
123 EEO disconnection safety end

point
122 EEO disconnection safety start
point
K1 301 60
101 Control cabinet emergency stop
(EEO-related 301 53 signal start point
functions)
Plug type: 15110048
Pin - 4.2 mm - Double 101 110 301 24 V power supply +
row - 2x6P - Plug - 125 Car top EEO shorting point
122 118
White 5566 series
(RoHS) 118 Pit EEO shorting point
123 125
110 Control cabinet emergency stop
signal end point
53 EEO NC contact
60 EEO signal input - X9
- 66 -
24 V power supply -
0 VAC input of power supply
K2
(Input of power BK+ BK- 302 board
supplies inside the 202 110 V input of brake power
202 201
control cabinet) BK+ supply board
Plug type: 15110046 301 24 V power supply +
Pin - 4.2 mm - Double
row - 2x5P - Plug - 201 220 VAC input of power supply
White - 5566 series 302 301 BK- board
(RoHS)
0 V input of brake power supply
board
Toroidal transformer power

K3
supply - N
(Toroidal 202
207 101A Toroidal transformer power
transformer) 207
Plug type: 15110028 supply - L
102
Pin - 4.2 mm - Double 202 102 Transformer winding in safety
row - 2x3P - White - 9A 101A
circuit
(RoHS)
Safety circuit start point (110 V)
K4
(Emergency power
supply) +12V DC12 +12V System standby power input
Plug type: 15110032
DC12 12 VDC power supply +
Pin - 4.2 mm - Double
(RoHS)
K5
(Up/Down leveling)
302 FL1 302 24 V power supply -
Plug type: 15110032
Pin - 4.2 mm - Double 301 FL2 FL2 Down leveling signal input - FL2
row - 2x2P - White - 9A FL1 Up leveling signal input - FL1
(RoHS)
- 67 -
BK+ Connected to the brake

contactor
ZQA1 Connected to the RUN contactor
ZQA1 Brake 1 arc extinguishing
Y1 RUN contactor output control
Y2 Brake contactor 1 output
301 X8 control
Y3 Shorting motor stator contactor
301 X7
output control
301 X6
M3 Common terminal of shorting
K6
(Contactor output motor stator contactor output
and feedback) M3 101 301 24 V power supply +
Plug type: 15110513 Y3 102 301 24 V power supply +
Connector plastic
Y2 102 301 24 V power supply +
housing - Plug - 4.2
mm - Double row - Y1 102 BK- Connected to the brake
2x12P - White - Made contactor
in China (RoHS)
ZQ2- Connected to the RUN contactor
ZQA1 ZQ1+
ZQ1+ Brake 1 arc extinguishing
ZQA1 ZQ2-
BK+ BK- 102 Safety circuit - neutral wire
101 Safety circuit start point (110 V)
X6 RUN contactor feedback
X7 Brake contactor feedback
X8 Shorting motor stator contactor
feedback
SGC2 Auxiliary brake control signal

output 1
130 Safety circuit end point signal
K13
132 Front door lock circuit end
(ADO terminal 1)
SGC2 130 132 point
Plug type: 15110026
Pin - 4.2 mm - Double SGC3 133 134 SGC3 Auxiliary brake control signal
row - 2x4P - White - 9A output 2
(RoHS)
133 Front door lock circuit end
point
134 Rear door lock circuit end point
- 68 -
FL1 Up leveling signal input - FL1

FL2 Down leveling signal input - FL2
K14 301 24 V power supply +
CAN1+
CAN1-
302
301
FL2
FL1
(ADO terminal 2) 302 24 V power supply -
CAN1+ CAN1+
CAN1- CAN1-
3.1.5 Grounding System
An M4 threaded hole is reserved for users in the control cabinet to connect the
grounding cable.
Ground the exposed conductive part to ensure that the control cabinet enclosure and
the grid grounding cable have the same electromotive force (EMF), thereby avoiding
personal injuries caused by electric shock through indirect contact.
M4 threaded hole used

for connecting the
grounding cable
Shielding ring
Figure 3-10 Installation of the grounding system
◆◆ Mark the grounding cable.
◆◆ Before wiring, confirm that the control cabinet is de-energized.
NOTE ◆◆ After the wiring is complete, confirm that all bolts on the copper busbar
are tightened to prevent current leakage.
- 69 -
3.1.6 PG Card Wiring
A speed FVC system is formed by connecting the J1 and CN1 terminals on the MCTC-
PG card to the CN3 terminal on the MCB (MCTC-MCB-E2) and the encoder respectively.
The connection between different MCTC-PG cards and the MCB is the same, but the
connection between the MCTC-PG cards and the encoder varies with the port type of
these cards.
◆◆ The PG card is not equipped by default. Therefore, purchase it separately.

NOTE
The following figure shows the electrical wiring between the MCTC-PG-E and the control
cabinet.
Braking resistor
Traction
N + ‒ PB motor
U
Three-phase R
V M
five-wire AC S Encoder
W
power supply T Control cabinet
J1 CN1
J12
MCTC-PG-E
PG card
Figure 3-11 Electrical wiring between the MCTC-PG-E and the control cabinet
◆◆ The CN1 terminal of the MCTC-PG-A2 is a screw-clamping terminal. Before

installation, prepare a straight screwdriver.
◆◆ The CN1 terminal of the MCTC-PG-E is a DB15 female. Prepare an encoder

NOTE
cable equipped with a DB15 male.
- 70 -
Braking resistor
Traction
N + ‒ PB motor
U
Three-phase R
V M
five-wire AC S Communication
W
power supply T Control cabinet encoder
J8
Figure 3-12 Electrical wiring between the communication encoder and the control cabinet
◆◆ The communication encoder requires a dedicated cable instead of a PG

card. The communication encoder terminal J8 is located on the right side
of the main power terminal P1.
◆◆ If a communication encoder is to be used, consult the sales personnel of

NOTE Inovance for the recommended motor selection.
◆◆ After replacing the communication encoder, confirm whether the encoder

parameters match the motor parameters.
- 71 -
3.2 Wiring of External Interfaces
Encoder terminal
Bottom cable inlet hole
Figure 3-13 Wiring of external interfaces on the MR control cabinet
Encoder terminal
Threaded hole for power cables

Threaded hole for signal cables
Figure 3-14 Wiring of external interfaces on the MRL control cabinet
- 72 -
3.3 Recommended Peripherals

For better use of the control cabinet, prepare peripheral cables according to the
following table.
Table 3-8 Recommended peripheral cables
Recommended
Recommended Recommended
Power Rating Cross Sectional
Recommended Cross Sectional Cross Sectional
of Control Area of
Circuit Breaker Area of Power Area of Control
Cabinet Grounding
(A) Cable Cable
(kW) Cable
(mm2) (mm2)
(mm2)
8.3 32 4 0.75 4
17 50 6 0.75 6
3.4 Major Electrical Circuits

This section mainly describes the major electrical circuits of the control cabinet. To
ensure the normal operation of the entire circuit, read this section and the schematic
diagrams of the control cabinet before using the product.
3.4.1 Main Circuit
◆◆ Ensure that the main circuit input cable is a three-phase five-wire cable
and the power distribution box is equipped with a built-in quadruple air
switch. Additionally, disconnect the three-phase power supply and neutral
wire. Note: The input power supply of the elevator system must be
three-phase five-wire. Otherwise, the system cannot operate normally.
◆◆ The power distribution box in the machine room is equipped with a

NOTE car lighting RCD and a shaft lighting RCD to implement leakage current
protection for the car/shaft lighting and the circuits whose socket voltage
exceeds 50 V. It is also supplied with a dual control shaft lighting switch.
◆◆ The control cabinet is equipped with two onboard fuses: 1 A fuse for the
safety circuit and 5 A fuse for the door operator power supply.
- 73 -
3.4.2 Safety and Door Lock Circuits
For the safety circuit schematic diagram, see the Electrical Schematic Diagrams of
Tomorrow Series Integrated Elevator Control Cabinet .
The MCB is designed with four high voltage detection points (X25, X26, X27, and X28)
which are used for safety detection, door lock stuck detection, door lock detection, and
door lock stuck detection respectively. Internally, it is added with three safety circuit
high voltage detection points used for indicating the on/off state of the control cabinet
safety circuit, pit safety circuit, and machine room safety circuit. This allows users to
locate the safety circuit fault on the site conveniently.
The safety circuit is powered up by the control transformer (TRF) with a standard 125
VAC output voltage.
Figure 3-15 Control transformer
Table 3-9 Control transformer (TRF) parameters
Model Capacity Input Voltage Output Voltage
TRF 63 VA 220 VAC 125 VAC
◆◆ The control transformer (TRF) has over-temperature protection. This

function is activated when the transformer temperature reaches 105℃
NOTE and deactivated when the transformer temperature drops to 90℃ .
◆◆ Two specifications are available for the safety circuit: 125 V (default
voltage) and 110 V. When the number of floors is 40 floors or below, 110 V
NOTE is used because of the low voltage drop of the safety circuit.
After the emergency stop switch in the control cabinet operates, the safety circuit
becomes disconnected when the electrical switch controlling safety components is off.
At startup, the elevator runs properly only when the four high voltage inputs are normal
(that is, both the safety circuit and door lock circuit are normal).
- 74 -
3.4.3 Inspection and EEO Circuits
EEO parameters
Parameter No. Parameter Name Parameter Setting
F5-04 X4 function selection 118: Door lock bypass NC input
F5-09 X9 function selection 116: EEO NC input
F5-10 X10 function selection 09: EEO up NO input
F5-11 X11 function selection 10: EEO down NO input
Schematic diagram
The following figure shows the inspection and EEO circuits of the elevator system.
Bypass door lock plug-in
1 2 3 4
Car top
Normal/Inspection TCI
1 3
knob 2 4
Run button 3
TCIB
Normal/EEO 4
knob
2 4
CIS
Up button 3 3
Down button
1 3
TCIU TCID
4 4
X4 301 X9 60 301 60 301 53 301 X12 X13 X14

1 2 3 4 6 12 5 11 4 3 2 1
S1 K1 Y4
EEO operating panel
Run button Up button
CIB CIU
MCTC-MCB-E2 Down button

CID MCU MCTC-CTB-H5
Figure 3-16 Inspection and EEO circuits
You can control the elevator to enter the EEO and inspection states by turning the
Normal/EEO knob in the control cabinet and the car top Normal/Inspection knob to the
EEO and inspection position respectively.
After the car top Normal/Inspection knob is turned to Inspection position, the CTB
inspection signal (X12) becomes active and the safety circuit is disconnected. When
you press the RUN and direction (UP or DOWN) buttons on the car top simultaneously,
the safety circuit becomes on and the elevator starts to run in the inspection state.
Similarly, after the Normal/EEO knob is turned to EEO position, you can move the car
only by pressing the RUN and direction (UP or DOWN) buttons in the control cabinet
simultaneously. The Normal/Inspection knob overrides the Normal/EEO knob by
disconnecting the safety circuit.
- 75 -
3.4.4 Bypass Circuit
To meet the requirements of the door lock bypass function, a set of bypass connectors
are added to the MCB circuit.
For the bypass circuit schematic diagram, see the Electrical Schematic Diagrams of
State description of bypass devices
S1 ON S1 OFF
Terminal State Left four Right four
S2 ON S2 OFF OFF OFF
pins of S2 pins of S2
Signal State of
X4/X9 ON X4/X9 OFF
Input Points
Landing door Landing door

Corresponding Normal/
Forced EEO lock circuit lock circuit
Function State Automatic
bypass bypass
Normal state Normal state Normal state Normal state

Landing door bypass
Landing door bypass
Landing door bypass
Landing door bypass

Corresponding
Car door bypass
Car door bypass
Car door bypass
Car door bypass

State Shown in
Figure
Corresponding function states: normal, forced EEO, landing door contact bypass, and
car door contact bypass
◆◆ S1/S2 is ON when the bypass plug is inserted into it and OFF when the
bypass plug is removed.
NOTE
Operation instruction for bypass devices
S1
S2
S2: landing door bypass S2: car door bypass
Figure 3-17 Use of the bypass function
- 76 -
1. Pull out the bypass plug from S1 to let the elevator enter the forced EEO and bypass
states. Then, insert the bypass plug into S2 (see the preceding table for the insertion
position corresponding to each state) to short the landing/car door lock circuit. The
elevator is allowed to run under EEO or inspection only in the door close limit state.
The sound and light alarm device will operate during running.
2. After the operations are complete, insert the bypass plug into S1. Then, the elevator
returns to the normal state.
3.4.5 Brake Circuit
The following figure shows the brake circuit of the elevator system.
Main control board

MCTC-MCB-E2
K6 BK+
Brake power supply

1
K6 BK- +MR
RUN contactor
13
SW K6 ZQ1+ ZQ1+ MT
13 14 15 5
K12 ZQ1+
4
Motor
K6 ZQA1 brake
Brake contactor 3
coil
BY BY K6 ZQA1
3 4 6 5 2
Brake arc
extinguish
K6 ZQ2- ZQ2- MT
1 2 14 10
ZQ1+
K12 ZQ2- MT BK1
ZQ2- 301
5 6 1 2
Added when electric brake
release is equipped
MT
X18
1
MT BK2
301
7 1 2
MT
X22
2
Figure 3-18 Brake circuit
The brake circuit is shown in the preceding figure. "L+" and "L-" are the DC voltage
provided by the brake power supply board. They are internally connected to terminal
K6 on the MCB through the contacts of the RUN and brake contactors and externally
connected to the brake coil.
◆◆ The MT terminal is used as the motor brake power output interface.
◆◆ The circuit shown in the preceding figure is a standard DC brake circuit.

If the brake is used in AC applications, a customized interface board is
NOTE
required.
- 77 -
◆◆ The interface board is equipped with a DC brake follow current circuit and
related devices. If this circuit is unnecessary or the brake is to be used in
NOTE other AC circuits, customization is required to eliminate this circuit.
3.4.6 ARD Circuit
The circuit between the control cabinet and the automatic rescue device (ARD, model:
MCTC-ARD-C) is very simple and convenient. For the corresponding schematic diagram,
see the Electrical Schematic Diagrams of Tomorrow Series Integrated Elevator Control
Cabinet .
◆◆ The control system must be used together with an ARD with 220 V output.
Otherwise, the system cannot operate normally.
NOTE
3.4.7 Leveling Signal System Circuit
Leveling signals, including the leveling switches and leveling plates, are connected
to the input terminals of the controller. They enable the car to land at each floor
accurately.
The leveling switches are generally installed on the top of the car. This control cabinet
supports the installation of four leveling switches. The leveling plates are installed on
the guide rails, with one plate at each floor. Make sure that the length and verticality of
all the leveling plates are identical.
Leveling switches
Up leveling signal detection
Up door zone signal detection
Down door zone signal detection

Leveling plate
Down leveling signal detection
Car
Figure 3-19 Installation positions of the leveling switches
- 78 -
Table 3-10 Description of installation positions of the leveling switches
Connections Between Leveling Switches and Input

Installation Method
Terminals of the Controller
Up leveling
signal detection
Up leveling signal
Up door zone
signal detection Up door zone signal
Down door zone Down door zone signal
signal detection
Down leveling signal
Down leveling
signal detection
Parameter Setting State monitoring
F5-01 = 1
Bit10 of FA-33: Up leveling state monitoring
F5-02 = 3
Bit11 of FA-33: Down leveling state monitoring
F5-03 = 2
Bit3 of FA-26: Door zone signal monitoring
Bit6 of F6-52 = 1 (On)
Bit1 of FA-26: Up door zone signal monitoring
Bit9 of F5-25 = 1 (NO)
Bit2 of FA-26: Down door zone signal monitoring
Bit10 of F5-25 = 1 (NO)
◆◆ The ADO and ADC are standard functions of the control system. All leveling
switches must be NO.
◆◆ After the up/down door zone signal is transmitted to the machine room
NOTE control system, it must be transmitted to the ADO system in which a door
zone signal is generated and sent to the main control system.
3.5 Overall System Wiring

For the overall system wiring diagram, see the Electrical Schematic Diagrams of
- 79 -
4 Commissioning Tools
Four types of commissioning tools are available for the control cabinet: 3-button
keypad on the MCB, LED operating panel, host controller monitoring software, and
mobile phone commissioning software.
Commissioning Tool Function Description Remarks
Used to input the shaft commissioning commands

Keypad Standard
and view the floor information.
LED operating panel Used to view and modify parameters related to

Optional
(MDKE) elevator drive and control.
LED operating panel Used to upload, download, view, and modify

Optional
(MDKE6) parameters.
Connect the MCB to your mobile phone through

Mobile phone
an external WIFI module. Using the commissioning
commissioning Optional
software, you can commission the elevator as well
software
as upload and download parameters.
This document only describes the commonly-used keypad and LED operation panel
(MDKE) in detail.
4.1 Keypad
The keypad consists of three LEDs and three buttons. You can view the information
about the control cabinet and input simple commands using the keypad.
◆◆ Before operations, wear insulation gloves to avoid an electric shock or

damage to control board components caused by the static electricity in
your body.
NOTE ◆◆ Never operate the keys with metal or sharp tools. Failure to comply will
result in a short circuit or damage to components.
- 80 -
The following figure shows the local appearance of the keypad.
E B
F G C
D DP
PRG ADD SET
Figure 4-1 3-button keypad
The display area of the keypad includes three 7-segment LEDs, and the three buttons
are defined as PRG, ADD, and SET.
Button Function
◆◆ Displays the current function menu No. in any state and exits the current
PRG
operation.
◆◆ Increases the No. or value of the function menu.

ADD
◆◆ Used as the door open command in F-6 menu.
◆◆ Enters the function menu editing mode as well as confirms and saves
SET operations.
◆◆ Used as the door close command in F-6 menu.
Figure 4-2 shows the operations of calling an elevator to floor 4 using the keypad.
Default display (current floor) Menu mode Menu editing mode
PRG
...
FA ADD F3
...
Fb FC F0 F1 F2
SET
PRG
Abort ADD
SET
Save
Figure 4-2 Setting procedure for calling an elevator
For the functions of each keypad menu, see "6.1 Keypad Parameters" on Page 111 .
- 81 -
4.2 LED Operating Panel

The LED operating panel is connected to the RJ45 interface of the control cabinet
through a LAN cable (8-core flat cable). Using the LED operating panel, you can modify
the parameters, monitor the working status of the control cabinet, and start or stop the
control cabinet under operating panel control. The following figure shows the panel.
Reserved Running direction indicator
Running status indicator

RUN LOCAL/REMOT FWD/REV TUNE/TC
Data display area

Unit indicator
Hz A V
RPM %
Increment key
Programming key PRG ENTER Confirm key
Quick menu key QUICK Shift key

Decrement key
Run key RUN MF.K
STOP
Stop/Reset key
RES
Fault hiding key
Figure 4-3 LED operating panel
4.2.1 Keys
Key Name Function
Programming key Enter or exit Level I menu.
Enter the menu interfaces level by level, and confirm

Confirm key
parameter settings.
Increment key Increase the data or parameter.
Decrement key Decrease the data or parameter.
Select the displayed parameters in turn in the stop or

running state.
Shift key
Select the digit to be modified when modifying a
parameter value.
- 82 -
Key Name Function
Start the control cabinet in the operating panel control

Run key
mode.
In the operating panel control mode, this key is used to

Stop/Reset key stop the control cabinet when it is running and perform
a reset operation when it is faulty.
Quick menu key Enter or exit the Level I quick menu.
Display or hide the fault information in the fault state,

Fault hiding key
which facilitates parameter viewing.
4.2.2 Indicators
In the following table, indicates ON, indicates OFF, and indicates flashing.
Table 4-1 Description of indicators on the operating panel
Status Status Description
RUN OFF: Stop

RUN
Running status
indicator ON: Running
RUN
FWD/REV OFF: Forward running

FWD/REV
Running direction
indicator ON: Reverse running
FWD/REV
OFF: --
TUNE/TC
TUNE/TC
ON: Auto-tuning state
Auto-tuning indicator TUNE/TC
Flashing: --
TUNE/TC
Hz
— RPM — A — % — V Unit of frequency: Hz
A
Hz — RPM — —%— V Unit of current: A
V
Hz — RPM — A — % — Unit of voltage: V
- 83 -
Status Status Description
Hz A
— RPM — —%— V Unit of rotational speed: RPM
A V
Hz — RPM — —%— Percentage: %
4.2.3 Data Display
The 5-digit LEDs on the operating panel can display the frequency reference, output
frequency, various monitoring data, and fault codes.
Table 4-2 LED displays and actual data
LED Actual LED Actual LED Actual LED Actual

Display Data Display Data Display Data Display Data
0 6 C N
1 7 c P
2 8 D R
3 9 E T
4 A F U
5, S B L u
4.2.4 Basic Operations
The LED operating panel adopts a three-level menu to perform operations such as
parameter setting. It consists of:
■ Level I menu: parameter group
■ Level II menu: parameter No.
■ Level III menu: parameter setting value
- 84 -
Paremeter group Paremeter No. Paremeter value
FP
.
.
.
FA
F9 F0-07
After power-on .
. .
or initialization . .
. .
.
F1
.
PRG
ENTER F0-01 ENTER
ENTER
0.000 Level I menu F0 Level II menu F0-00 Level III menu 1 ENTER F0-01
FP PRG
F0-07
PRG
.
.
. . .
. .
. .
PRG
FA F0-01
F9
.
.
.
F0
Parameter display
Set the displayed parameters through FA-01 (Parameter display during running) and
FA-02 (Parameter display at stop). Each binary bit of FA-01 and FA-02 corresponds to a
specific parameter (For details, see the parameter descriptions.). If a bit is set to 1, the
parameter indicated by this bit is displayed. If this bit is set to 0, the parameter is not
displayed.
In the stop or running state, you can press key on the operating panel to switch
each bit of FA-01 and FA-02 so that multiple state parameters are displayed.
① Running state parameters
In the running state, a total of 16 running state parameters can be displayed. Select
whether to display a parameter by setting the corresponding binary bit of FA-01.
② Stop state parameters
In the stop state, a total of 16 stop state parameters can be displayed. Select whether to
display a parameter by setting the corresponding binary bit of FA-02.
◆◆ For more details, see the description of FA-01 and FA-02 in "6 Parameter
Description" on Page 111 .
NOTE
- 85 -
5 System Commissioning
This chapter describes the basic commissioning procedure of the control cabinet. By
following the instructions, you can perform complete commissioning on the elevator
system and implement all basic normal running functions of the elevator.
5.1 Trial Run Commissioning Flowchart
Start
Safety and circuit inspections
Turn the power on and confirm

the controller state.
Commissioning at inspection Motor auto-tuning

speed Running test at inspection speed
Shaft auto-tuning
UCMP
Function commissioning
Braking force detection
End
Figure 5-1 General commissioning flowchart
5.2 Safety and Circuit Inspections

The following figure shows the flowchart of system wiring safety inspection.
Step 1: Check the mechanical safety.
Step 2: Check the electrical wiring.
Step 3: Check the electrical safety.
Step 4: Check the rotary encoder.
Figure 5-2 Flowchart of safety and circuit inspections before power-on
- 86 -
◆◆ The I/O interfaces of the control cabinet have default function allocations
and settings. You can change the function allocations and settings based
on your usage habits. The application examples in this user guide are all
NOTE
based on the default settings.
Step 1: Check the mechanical safety.
Confirm that the shaft is unobstructed, nobody is in the shaft, in the car, or on the car
top, and the conditions for safe elevator running are met.
Step 2: Check the electrical wiring.
No. Inspection Item
Check whether the power input terminals (R/S/T/N) are connected

□ 1
correctly and securely.
Check whether motor cables (U/V/W) are connected to the controller

□ 2
correctly and securely.
Check whether the controller (control cabinet) and the motor are
□ 3
grounded correctly.
Check whether the safety circuit is on and whether the emergency stop
□ 4 button and switch in the control cabinet and machine room operate
properly.
Check whether the door lock circuit is on and whether it is disconnected

□ 5
when the car door or any landing door opens.
CAUTION
To guarantee safe elevator running, pay attention to the following points:
◆◆ Short the safety circuit with caution. If you start the elevator when
the safety circuit is shorted, severe personal injuries or even death
may be caused.
◆◆ Before commissioning, confirm that nobody is in the shaft. Failure to

comply may result in personal injuries.
◆◆ Never perform running at normal speed when the safety circuit is

shorted.
◆◆ Never start the elevator when the door lock circuit is shorted. Failure
to comply will result in severe personal injuries or even death.
- 87 -
Step 3: Check the electrical safety.
No. Inspection Item
Check whether the line voltage of the user power supply is within 380 V
□ 1
± 7%, with the phase unbalance factor not exceeding 3%.
Check whether the total inlet cable gauge and total switch capacity meet
□ 2
the requirements.
Check whether input power supply (R/S/T) is short-circuited between

□ 3
phases and to ground.
Check whether the controller UVW phases are mutually short-circuited or

□ 4 short-circuited to ground and whether the motor UVW phases are short-
circuited to ground.
Check whether a short circuit to ground exists on the output side of the
□ 5
transformer.
Check whether the 220 V user power supply is short-circuited between

□ 6
phases and to ground.
Check whether there is a short circuit between the positive and negative
electrodes on the output side of 24 V switched-mode power supply and
□ 7
whether the 24 V switched-mode power supply is short-circuited to
ground.
Check whether there is a short circuit between the CAN/Modbus

□ 8
communication cable and the ground or 24 V power supply.
Step 4: Check the rotary encoder.
No. Inspection Item
□ 1 Check whether the encoder is installed securely and connected reliably.
Check whether the encoder cable and high-voltage circuit cable are laid
□ 2
in different ducts to prevent interference.
You are recommended to lead the encoder cable into the control
cabinet. If the encoder cable is not long enough and an extension cable
□ 3
is required, the extension cable must be shielded and welded to the
encoder cable.
Ensure that the shield of the encoder is reliably grounded on the

□ 4 controller side. (Single-end grounding is recommended to prevent
interference.)
- 88 -
5.3 Power-on and Controller State Confirmation
5.3.1 Checking the Power-on State
No. Inspection Item
After power-on, check whether the line voltage of the three-phase

controller input power supply (R/S/T) is within 380–440 VAC, with the
□ 1 phase unbalance factor not exceeding 3%. If the voltage is abnormal,
turn the power off and check the user power supply and the wiring of
input power supply (R/S/T).
Check whether the input voltage to pins 1 and 6 of the MCB power
terminal K2 is 24 VDC ± 15%. If the voltage is abnormal, turn the power
□ 2
off and check the switched-mode power supply and the wiring of 24 VDC
circuit.
5.3.2 Checking the Controller State at Normal Power-on
No. Inspection Item
After power-on, check whether the LEDs have a display. If the LEDs do
□ 1
not light up, check the controller power supply.
If all input signal indicators are OFF, check the external 24 VDC power
□ 2
supply.
LEDs have a display.
MCB: Input signals active
Figure 5-3 LED display at normal power-on of MCB
- 89 -
5.3.3 Possible Controller States and Troubleshooting Before Commissioning
Possible controller states:
During commissioning, especially at first-time power-on, certain faults may occur

because the conditions for automatic elevator running are not met or some peripheral
signals are not connected. Such faults include Err35, Err41, Err42, Err51, Err52, and
Err58.
Troubleshoot these faults as follows before commissioning at inspection speed.
Table 5-1 Troubleshooting before commissioning at inspection speed
Fault
Fault Fault Description Solution
Code
Check whether X25 indicator

is active. If this indicator
1. If this fault occurs, the
is OFF, the safety circuit is
elevator cannot run and
disconnected. In this case,
Safety circuit be commissioned.
Err41 repair the safety circuit and
fault 2. By default, X25 is
perform commissioning at
connected to the safety
inspection speed. The safety
circuit.
circuit is 110 (K4-P09) to 130
(K1-P01).
Check whether X27 indicator

is active. If this indicator is
1. If this fault occurs, the
OFF, the door lock circuit is
elevator cannot run and
disconnected. In this case,
Door lock circuit be commissioned.
Err42 repair the door lock circuit
fault 2. By default, X27 is
and perform commissioning at
connected to the door
inspection speed.
lock circuit.
Note: Never short the door lock
circuit before commissioning.
This fault is reported at each Press key on the LED

Shaft auto- power-on before shaft auto-
operating panel to clear the
Err35 tuning data tuning is performed. It does
fault code display, and then
abnormal not affect commissioning at
perform commissioning at
inspection speed.
inspection speed.
- 90 -
Fault
Fault Fault Description Solution
Code
1. This fault does not

affect commissioning at
CAN inspection speed, but it
Err51 communication affects commissioning at
fault normal speed. Press key on the LED
2. The COP indicator is OFF operating panel to clear the

when this fault occurs. fault code display, and then
1. This fault does not affect perform commissioning at
Modbus motor auto-tuning and inspection speed.
Err52 communication inspection running.
fault 2. The HOP indicator is OFF
when this fault occurs.
Connect X14 and X15 to slow-

1. The elevator cannot run
down switches 1 (NC inputs)
when this fault occurs.
and check whether they are OFF
The fault must be rectified
simultaneously. Additionally,
to perform commissioning
Shaft position confirm whether slow-down
at inspection speed.
Err58 switches switches 1 are connected to the
2. Fault reason: The
abnormal MCB and act properly.
feedback inputs of up
Up slow-down 1 is: 301 (BD-
slow-down switch 1 and
P01) — ULS1 (BD-P03)
down slow-down switch 1
Down slow-down 1 is: 301 (BE-
are active simultaneously.
P01) — DLS1 (BE-P03)
5.4 Commissioning at Inspection Speed
CAUTION
◆◆ Before starting commissioning at inspection speed, make sure that all

installations and wirings comply with the technical specifications for
electrical safety.
◆◆ During auto-tuning with the car, pay attention to the motor running
direction to prevent the elevator from getting too close to terminal floors.
It is recommended to start commissioning at inspection speed at a floor
at least two floors away from terminal floors.
◆◆ In the EEO state, certain shaft safety circuits will be shorted. When
performing EEOs during commissioning at inspection speed, take care
when the car runs in a position close to the top/bottom terminal floor.
- 91 -
DANGER
To guarantee safe elevator running, pay attention to the following points:
◆◆ The motor may rotate during auto-tuning. Keep a safe distance from the
motor to prevent personal injuries.
◆◆ During with-load auto-tuning, make sure that nobody is in the shaft.

Failure to comply will cause personal injuries or even death.
The commissioning at inspection speed includes two stages: motor auto-tuning and
running test at inspection speed.
Commissioning at inspection speed
Motor auto-tuning Running test at inspection speed
Synchronous motor with-load Confirm that the motor

auto-tuning running direction is correct.
Synchronous motor static auto- Confirm that the motor

tuning running current is proper.
Semi-automatic angle-free auto- Confirm that the car top

tuning (synchronous motor) inspection is valid.
Automatic angle-free auto- Confirm that the shaft is

tuning (synchronous motor) unobstructed.
Asynchronous motor no-load Confirm that the slow-down

auto-tuning switches, and limit switches
are active.
Asynchronous motor with-load
auto-tuning
- 92 -
5.4.1 Motor Auto-Tuning
1 Motor auto-tuning parameters
Table 5-2 Parameters related to motor auto-tuning
Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting Range
0: Asynchronous motor
F1-25 Motor type
1: Synchronous motor
0: Sin/Cos encoder (synchronous motor)

1: UVW encoder (synchronous motor)
F1-00 Encoder type 2: ABZ encoder (asynchronous motor)
3: ECN413/1313 absolute encoder
4: Communication encoder
Encoder pulses per

F1-12 0–10000
revolution (PPR)
Rated motor power/voltage/ Model dependent parameters, requiring

F1-01 to F1-05
current/frequency/speed manual input
0: Operating panel control

F0-01 Command source selection
1: Distance control
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning
2: No-load auto-tuning
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode
3: Shaft auto-tuning 1
5: Synchronous motor static auto-tuning
2 Motor auto-tuning flowcharts
① Synchronous motor auto-tuning
Three modes are available for synchronous motor auto-tuning.
- 93 -
Mode 1: Synchronous motor with-load auto-tuning (motor connected with the car)
The elevator enters the EEO When the X9 indicator on the MCB becomes OFF, the
state. elevator enters the EEO state.
During with-load auto-tuning, F0-01 (Command source

Confirm that F0-01 is 1.
selection) must be 1.
Set the motor type: F1-25 = 1. Set F1-25 (Motor type) to 1 (Synchronous motor).
① See the following parameters on the motor nameplate:

rated power, rated voltage, rated current, rated
Set the motor parameters: F1-
frequency, and rated speed.
01 to F1-05.
② Set these parameters correctly according to the
nameplate. Otherwise, faults will occur.
① Set F1-00 (Encoder type) according to the actual

encoder type: 0: Sin/Cos encoder; 1: UVW encoder; 3:
Set the encoder parameters:
ECN413/1313 absolute encoder
F1-00 and F1-12.
② Set F1-12 (Encoder PPR) according to the encoder
nameplate.
Set F1-11 (Auto-tuning mode) to 1 and press the ENTER key,

the LED operating panel displays "TUNE", indicating that
the motor enters the auto-tuning state. If the LED operating
panel displays "F1-12", it indicates that the motor failed to
F1-11 = 1 enter the auto-tuning state.
① Check whether the elevator is in the EEO state.
② Check whether the MCB displays a fault. If yes, perform
troubleshooting.
③ Check whether F0-01 (Command source selection) is 1.
Rotate the Normal/EEO knob During auto-tuning, the Normal/EEO knob must be
to the EEO position, press and held down. After auto-tuning finished, the controller
hold the UP or DOWN and automatically stops outputs. In this case, rotate the
Normal/Inspection knob to the Inspection position and
RUN buttons, and start auto-
release the UP or DOWN and RUN buttons.
tuning.
① The MCB displays the auto-tuned encoder angle for 3s

after auto-tuning has been completed.
② Perform multiple times of auto-tuning and confirm
that the difference between the encoder angles (F1-06)
Auto-tuning is complete. obtained during two adjacent auto-tuning operations
is within ±5° .
③ F1-08 (Synchronous motor wiring mode) is 0 or 8 in
most cases. It must remain stable during multiple
times of auto-tuning operations.
Figure 5-4 Synchronous motor with-load auto-tuning
- 94 -
Mode 2: Synchronous motor static auto-tuning (motor connected with the car, with
brake closed and motor not rotate)
During with-load auto-tuning, F0-01 (Command source

Confirm that F0-01 is 1. selection) must be 1.

01 to F1-05.
ABZ encoder; 3: ECN413/1313 absolute encoder; 4:
Communication encoder
F1-00 and F1-12.
nameplate.
Note: When F1-00 is 4, set F1-12 to 2048.

troubleshooting.
During auto-tuning, the Normal/EEO knob must be

Rotate the Normal/EEO knob
held down. After auto-tuning finished, the controller
to the EEO position, press and
automatically stops outputs. In this case, rotate the
hold the UP or DOWN and RUN
Normal/Inspection knob to the Inspection position and
buttons, and start auto-tuning. release the UP or DOWN and RUN buttons.
① If motor auto-tuning succeeded, the MCB displays the

auto-tuned encoder angle for 3s. If motor auto-tuning
failed, the MCB displays "Err".
Auto-tuning is complete.
obtained during two adjacent auto-tuning operations is
within ±5° .
most cases. It must remain stable during multiple times
of auto-tuning operations.
Figure 5-5 Synchronous motor static auto-tuning
- 95 -
Mode 3: Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning (motor disconnected from the car)
During no-load-tuning, F0-01 (Command source selection)
Confirm that F0-01 is 0. must be 0.

Set the motor parameters: F1- frequency, and rated speed.
01 to F1-05. ② Set these parameters correctly according to the

ECN413/1313 absolute encoder
F1-00 and F1-12.
nameplate.

troubleshooting.
Perform auto-tuning:
In the no-load auto-tuning state, the brake must be opened
① Manually open the brake.
manually.
② Press the RUN key on the
After auto-tuning is complete, the controller automatically
LED operating panel to start stops outputs.
auto-tuning.
① The MCB displays the auto-tuned encoder angle for 3s
after auto-tuning has been completed.
Auto-tuning is complete. obtained during two adjacent auto-tuning operations is
within ±5° .
most cases. It must remain stable during multiple times
of auto-tuning operations.
Restore F0-01 (Command After auto-tuning has been completed, restore F0-01 to 1.
source selection) to 1. Otherwise, the elevator cannot run.
Figure 5-6 Synchronous motor no-load auto-tuning
- 96 -
Pay attention to the following precautions during synchronous motor auto-

tuning:
◆◆ Synchronous motor auto-tuning learns the initial motor pole angle, initial
encoder angle, motor wiring mode, and D-axis and Q-axis inductance.
◆◆ Perform three or more times of auto-tuning. Compare the auto-tuned

values of F1-06 (Encoder initial angle), and make sure that the difference
between the values (F1-06) obtained during two adjacent auto-tuning
operations is within ±5° .
NOTE
◆◆ Perform motor auto-tuning again after changing the encoder, encoder
cable, motor wiring sequence, or rated motor current/frequency/speed.
◆◆ You can modify F1-06 (Encoder initial angle) manually. The modification
takes effect immediately. After replacing the MCB, therefore, you can
directly run the controller by manually setting F1-06 to the previous value,
without performing motor auto-tuning.
- 97 -
② Asynchronous motor auto-tuning
Asynchronous motor with-load auto-tuning (motor connected with the car)

must be 0.
Set the motor type: F1-25 = 0. Set F1-25 (Motor type) to 0 (Asynchronous motor).

Set the motor parameters: F1- frequency, and rated speed.
01 to F1-05. ② Set these parameters correctly according to the

Set the encoder parameters: encoder type (2: ABZ encoder).
F1-00 and F1-12. ② Set F1-12 (Encoder PPR) according to the encoder
nameplate.
Set F1-11 (Auto-tuning mode) to 1 and press the ENTER
key, the LED operating panel displays "TUNE", indicating
that the motor enters the auto-tuning state. If the LED
operating panel displays "F1-12", it indicates that the
F1-11 = 1 motor failed to enter the auto-tuning state.
troubleshooting.
① After auto-tuning starts, the motor does not rotate,

but the current generates a whistling sound. The auto-
Press the RUN key on the LED tuning lasts for dozens of seconds.
operating panel to start auto- ② After auto-tuning is complete, the controller
tuning. automatically stops outputs.
③ Motor parameters F1-14 to F1-18 can be obtained
through auto-tuning.
source selection) to 1. Otherwise, the elevator cannot run at inspection speed.
Figure 5-7 Asynchronous motor with-load auto-tuning

- 98 -
Asynchronous motor no-load-tuning (motor disconnected from the car)
elevator enters the EEO state.
state.

must be 0.
Set the motor type: F1-25 = 0. Set F1-25 (Motor type) to 0 (Asynchronous motor).

01 to F1-05.

Set the encoder parameters: encoder type (2: ABZ encoder).
F1-00 and F1-12. ② Set F1-12 (Encoder PPR) according to the encoder
nameplate.
Set F1-11 (Auto-tuning mode) to 2 and press the ENTER
key, the LED operating panel displays "TUNE", indicating
that the motor enters the auto-tuning state. If the LED
operating panel displays "F1-12", it indicates that the
F1-11 = 2 motor failed to enter the auto-tuning state.
troubleshooting.
① In the no-load auto-tuning state, the motor rotates and

Perform auto-tuning: the brake must be opened manually. The auto-tuning
① Manually open the brake. lasts for dozens of seconds.
② Press the RUN key on the ② After auto-tuning is complete, the controller
LED operating panel to start automatically stops outputs.
auto-tuning. ③ Motor parameters F1-14 to F1-18 can be obtained
through auto-tuning.
source selection) to 1. Otherwise, the elevator cannot run.
Figure 5-8 Asynchronous motor no-load-tuning
- 99 -
Pay attention to the following precautions during asynchronous motor auto-

tuning:
◆◆ Ensure the correct sequence of encoder phases A and B during no-load

NOTE auto-tuning. Incorrect wiring will result in Err38. If Err38 occurs, exchange
phases A and B of the encoder.
The system processes the outputs of the RUN and brake contactors differently in
different motor auto-tuning modes, as described in the following table.
Table 5-3 Control states of the RUN and brake contactors and the motor
Auto-tuning
Mode No-load Auto-tuning With-load Auto-tuning
Working Synchronous
Synchronous
Mode Synchronous Asynchronous Motor With- Asynchronous
Motor Static
Object Motor Motor load Auto- motor
Auto-tuning
Controlled tuning
RUN contactor Working Working Working Working Working
Brake contactor Not working Not working Working Not working Not working
Motor Rotates Rotates Rotates Not rotates Not rotates
Possible faults during auto-tuning and corresponding solutions:
Fault
Fault Solution
Symptom
□ Check whether the encoder cable is disconnected, or replace
Err19 is
the PG card and perform auto-tuning.
reported.
□ Check the three-phase motor cables and output contactor.
□ Check whether the encoder cable and high-voltage circuit
cable are laid in different ducts to prevent interference.
□ Check whether the brake is fully opened. If not, check
whether the brake power supply and supply circuit are
Auto-tuning normal.
fails. □ Check whether the encoder cable is disconnected.
Err20 is
□ Check whether the encoder cable suffers interference
reported.
because it is too close to the motor cables.
□ Check whether the encoder is installed securely and not
damaged.
□ The low-power motor (such as P ≤ 7.5 kW) may jitter after
auto-tuning starts. If this occurs, decrease F2-00 (Speed loop
proportional gain 1) properly to a value within 10 to 40.
- 100 -
Fault
Fault Solution
Symptom
□ Change the motor wiring sequence and perform auto-tuning

again. The following figure shows how to exchange the
motor cables.
Exchange the
The motor motor cables.
Err20 and
wiring
Err33 are Note: Description of fault symptoms
sequence is
reported. ① During no-load auto-tuning, if the motor wiring sequence
incorrect.
is incorrect, the system reports Err20 (E0-00) with fault
subcode (E0-01) 3.
② During with-load auto-tuning, if the motor wiring sequence
is incorrect, the synchronous motor jitters, the system
reports Err33, and auto-tuning stops.
For an asynchronous motor, there is no prompt during auto-
tuning, but Err33 is reported during inspection running.
◆◆ When the preceding two problems occur, change the sequence of motor
cables connected to the controller.
◆◆ Adjustment principle of motor wiring sequence: Exchange any two

NOTE
adjacent motor cables once.
5.4.2 Running Test at Inspection Speed
Table 5-4 Parameters related to running test at inspection speed
Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting Range Default
Elevator running 0: Running direction unchanged

F2-10 0
direction 1: Running direction reversed
Elevator speed in the

F3-25 0.100–0.300 m/s 0.250 m/s
EEO state
- 101 -
Procedure for running test at inspection speed:
① Confirm that the motor rotates in the correct direction.
After auto-tuning is complete, perform trial run at inspection speed to check whether
the actual motor running direction is consistent with the command direction. If not,
change the motor direction by setting F2-10 (Elevator running direction).
② Confirm that the motor running current is proper.
In the inspection state, the motor current during no-load running is much smaller
than the rated motor current, and that during with-load running at a constant speed
does not exceed the rated motor current in most cases. After multiple times of auto-
tuning, if the difference between two adjacent auto-tuned encoder angles is very
small but the motor current during with-load running at a constant speed still exceeds
the rated motor current, check the following items:
□ Whether the brake is fully opened.
□ Whether the elevator balance coefficient is normal.
□ Whether the guide shoes for the car or counterweight are too tight.
③ Confirm that the car top inspection is valid.
Confirm that car top inspection is valid and the EEO is invalid. That is, the car top
inspection takes precedence over the EEO.
④ Confirm that the shaft is unobstructed.
Confirm that the shaft is not obstructed by any mechanical or building obstacles.
Otherwise, the car will be damaged.
⑤ Confirm that the slow-down switches and limit switches are active.
Check whether the slow-down switches and limit switches are active when the car
moves to a terminal floor. Take care in this process. Avoid too long running time and
distance each time because overtravel will cause mechanical damage to the car.
- 102 -
5.5 Shaft Auto-Tuning
1 Make preparations for shaft auto-tuning.
① Confirm that shaft switches operate properly.
The shaft switches include final limit switches, limit switches, slow-down switches,
and leveling switches.
② Confirm that leveling switches operate in the correct sequence.
Installing four leveling switches is recommended. For example, if four leveling

switches are installed:
● When the elevator runs up in the inspection state, the switches operate in this
sequence: up leveling switch ➡ up door zone switch ➡ down door zone switch ➡
down leveling switch
● When the elevator runs down in the inspection state, the switches operate in this
sequence: up leveling switch ➡ up door zone switch ➡ down door zone switch ➡
down leveling switch
③ Confirm that CAN communication is normal.
Check whether CAN communication between the MCB and the CTB is normal (no
Err51). Communication is normal if the CAN1 signal indicator flashes. If abnormal,
troubleshoot Err51 by following the descriptions in "7.2 Fault Information and
Solutions" on Page 111 .
Table 5-5 Parameters related to shaft auto-tuning
Parameter Parameter
Setting Range Default Remarks
No. Name
Based on the rated

F0-04 Rated speed 0.250–4.000 m/s 1.600 m/s
elevator speed.
Actual number of floors

Top floor of the
F6-00 F6-01 to 48 9 (Actual number of leveling
elevator
plates installed)
Bottom floor of
F6-01 1 to F6-00 1 -
the elevator
- 103 -
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Shaft auto-
F3-26 0.100–0.630 m/s 0.250 -
tuning speed
◆◆ After modifying F0-04 (Rated speed), perform shaft auto-tuning again.

Otherwise, the elevator runs improperly.
NOTE
2 Check whether the conditions for successful shaft auto-tuning are met.
① The elevator is in the EEO state.
② The elevator runs to a position below the leveling of the bottom floor (that is, at least
one leveling switch is disconnected from the leveling plate). (This condition applies
only to two-floor elevators.)
③ The down slow-down switch 1 signal input to the MCB is active. (This condition
applies only to two-floor elevators.)
④ The system does not report faults. If there is a fault, press on the LED
operating panel to reset it.
3 Perform shaft auto-tuning.
When the preceding conditions are met, start shaft auto-tuning in any of the following
methods:
① Set F1-11 (Auto-tuning mode) to 3 using the LED operating panel, and switch the
elevator to the normal state.
② Set F-7 (Floor auto-tuning command input) to 1 using the keypad, and switch the
elevator to the normal state.
After shaft auto-tuning starts, the elevator runs at the speed set in F3-26 (Shaft auto-
tuning speed). It automatically runs down to the leveling of the bottom floor and then
runs up to the leveling of the top floor and stops. If the keypad on the MCB displays
the current floor number (top floor) at this time, it indicates that shaft auto-tuning
succeeded.
If Err35 is reported during auto-tuning, it indicates that shaft auto-tuning failed. Perform
troubleshooting following "7.2 Fault Information and Solutions" on Page 111 , and perform
shaft auto-tuning again.
- 104 -
4 Perform a running test at normal speed.
After shaft auto-tuning has been completed successfully, the running at normal speed
may fail because the door operator controller and full-load and overload functions are
not commissioned. To solve this problem, enable the door open forbidden and overload
functions by setting parameters before performing a running test at normal speed.
Set F7-05 (Door open

Door open is forbidden.
forbidden) to 1.
Set F7-06 (Overload function) The system allows the elevator to shield the overload
to 1. signal and run at normal speed.
Turn the Normal/Inspection

knob to the Normal position.
① The call set by F7-00 (Car call floor registered) is the

same as the car call. You can set F7-00 to any floor
number and test the elevator running at normal
Call the elevator by setting F7- speed. Check whether the motor, elevator, and
00 (Car call floor registered) controller are abnormal during running.
and test the running at normal ② For initial tests, it is recommended to set F0-03
speed. (Maximum running speed) to a small value. If these
tests do not have any problem, set F0-03 to the
required value.
Commissioning is complete.
Restore F7-00 (Car call floor

registered) to F7-07 (Limit After the test is complete, restore F7-00 to F7-07 to 0.
function).
Figure 5-9 Flowchart of running test at normal speed
◆◆ After power-off and then power-on, F7-00 (Car call floor registered) to F7-
02 (Down hall call floor registered) and F7-05 (Door open forbidden) to
F7-07 (Limit function) will be restored to 0. If you need to continue the
NOTE
running test at normal speed, set these parameters again.
- 105 -
5.6 Function Commissioning
5.6.1 UCMP Function
1 Function description (default function, with certain actions modified by setting

the parameters)
When the landing door is unlocked and the car door is open, the elevator stopping
at a landing may move unexpectedly if the motor guaranteeing safe running or any
component of the drive control system fails. The UCMP device is used to avoid or stop
such movement.
Table 5-6 Model selection of the UCMP device
Motor Synchronous Motor Asynchronous Motor
MCTC-SCB-A4 (single MCTC-SCB-D4 (through-

Model MCTC-SCB-D4
door) type door)
◆◆ The through-type door only supports MCTC-SCB-D4 on the site.

NOTE
2 Installation of switches
)盍NN
Up leveling switch
Leveling plate
Up door zone switch

Leveling plate ≤ 300 mm
)NN
Down door zone switch
Down leveling switch

)盍NN
Figure 5-10 Recommended installation of Monarch UCMP switches
- 106 -
Requirements for switch installation:
① H1 ≤ 20 mm, H2 = 60 mm
② The leveling plate length cannot exceed 300 mm. The recommended length is 300
mm.
③ Two door zone switches are required. The length of leveling plates is determined by
the actual door open area (door vane length) of the elevator.
④ The door zone switches must be NO.
3 Related parameters
Parameter No. Parameter Name Setting Range
F-8 Test function 7: Manual UCMP test
0: Reserved
Program function
F3-24 1: Slip experiment
selection
2: Manual UCMP test
F5-01 X1 function selection 01: Up leveling signal NO
F5-03 X3 function selection 02: Down leveling signal NO
Test method:
① In the EEO state, the elevator stops in the door zone with the door lock closed.
② Set F-8 (Test function) to 7 using the keypad (or set F3-24 to 2 using the LED
operating panel). The keypad displays "E88", indicating that the elevator enters the
UCMP test mode. At this time, disconnect the door lock circuit.
③ Rotate the Normal/EEO knob to the EEO position and hold down the UP or DOWN
button. The shorting door lock circuit relay on the MCTC-SCB-A4 or MCTC-SCB-D4
shorts the door lock and the elevator runs in the EEO mode
④ After the elevator moves to non-door zone (door zone signal becomes inactive), the
UCMP module stops shorting the door lock, and the elevator reports Err65 (UCMP
fault) and stops running.
- 107 -
◆◆ When the elevator is not in the inspection state or the door zone, or the
door lock is inactive, the setting of F-8 to 7 or F3-24 to 2 is invalid.
◆◆ After F-8 is set to 7 or F3-24 is set to 2, clearing is automatically performed

after one running and after power failure.
◆◆ In the UCMP test mode, the elevator linearly accelerates to the inspection
NOTE
speed at the acceleration rate set by F3-08 after startup.
◆◆ Err65 cannot be automatically reset, even if the power is cycled.
◆◆ Err65 can be manually reset only in the inspection state.
5.6.2 Braking Force Detection

the parameters)
To prevent failure of the motor brake that guarantees safe running, check whether the
braking force meets the requirements periodically. The control system will monitor the
braking force regularly.
Parameter
Function Name Setting Range Default Remarks
No.
When it is set to 0, the

Torque output
F2-32 1s to 10s 5 torque output lasts for 5s
duration
by default.
50% to 150% of When it is set to 0, 80% of

Torque
F2-33 the rated motor 110 the rated motor torque is
amplitude
torque used by default.
8: Manual braking Use the keypad to start

F-8 Test function 0
force test the braking force test.
Braking force
F7-09 0–2 0 /
detection result
The countdown time is

Countdown for
automatically restored
F7-10 braking force 0–1440 1440
to 1440 after the test
detection period
finishes.
- 108 -
Manual test:
① The system is in the EEO state, and the EEO switch is active.
② With the door lock closed, the elevator stops in the door zone.
③ Set F-8 (Test function) to 8 using the keypad.
④ When the elevator enters the braking force test state, the MCB displays "E88".
⑤ The shorting motor stator and RUN contactors have an output, but the brake
contactor has no output.
⑥ The system outputs a torque according to the parameters related to the braking
force and starts the braking force test.
⑦ "E88" disappears on the MCB when the test is complete. The test result is determined
by the value of F7-09 (Braking force detection result). If F7-09 is 2, the elevator
reports Err66 (braking force failed) and stops running. This fault cannot be reset.
Automatic test:
When the braking force detection conditions (※Detection conditions in the following
NOTE) are met, the system automatically enters the test state. The operations are the
same as steps ④ , ⑤ , ⑥ , and ⑦ of the manual test.
Err66 cannot be reset through power-off and can be automatically reset only when the
braking force test is redone and passes.
- 109 -
◆◆ Countdown function: After 12 hours pass by, the system starts to judge
whether the following "condition 1" is met. If the braking force test has
been performed, the countdown parameter (F7-10) restores to 24 hours. If
not, the system proceeds to "condition 2" (forced test).
◆◆ During the automatic braking force test, no fault is reported for hall
calls. The keypad displays "E88" to indicate the test state. Hall calls can
be registered, but the elevator does not respond to them. After the test
is complete, the system returns to the normal state and responds to
registered hall calls, but the car calls are canceled. The elevator doors
cannot be opened or closed.
※
Detection conditions:
NOTE ◆◆ Condition 1: Normal braking force test
Under the condition of no car and hall calls, the braking force test is
performed after the elevator energy saving time is reached or three
minutes.
◆◆ Condition 2: Forced braking force test

The system makes a judgment ahead of 10 minutes. When the time set in
F7-10 is 10 minutes or below, the buzzer tweets for 30s. You can disable
the buzzer by setting Bit13 of F8-19. In this case, the registered hall calls
are reserved, but the car calls are canceled. The elevator doors can be
opened or closed. The system starts the braking force test after door close.
- 110 -
6 Parameter Description
6.1 Keypad Parameters

The menu function parameters of the keypad are described as follows:
■ F-0: Display of the floor number and running direction
By default, the F-0 menu is displayed on the keypad upon power-on. The first LED
indicates the running direction, and the last two LEDs indicate the current floor number.
When the elevator stops, the first LED has no display. When the elevator runs up/down,
the first LED flashes to indicate the running direction. When the system has a fault (no
fault exists before), the fault code scrolls automatically. If the fault is reset automatically,
the F-0 menu is displayed.
Current
Running direction
floor
Notes:
Stop state: No display
Running state: Flashes to indicate
the up/down direction
Fault state: Displays the fault code.
PRG UP SET
Figure 6-1 3-button keypad
■ F-1: Command input of the running floor
After you enter the F-1 menu by pressing the PRG, UP or SET key, the LEDs display the
bottom floor of the elevator (F6-01). Use the UP key to set your destination floor (range:
Bottom floor to Top floor) and press the SET key to save the setting. Then, the elevator
runs to the destination floor, and the display automatically switches to the F-0 menu.
■ F-2: Fault reset and display of the fault time and code
After you enter the F-2 menu by pressing the PRG, UP or SET key, the LEDs display "0".
You can press the UP key to change the parameter value within the range from 0 to 2.
1: If you select this value and press the SET key, the system fault is reset. Then, the
display automatically switches to the F-0 menu.
- 111 -
2: If you select this value and press the SET key, the LEDs display the codes and
occurrence time of 10 faults circularly. You can press the PRG key to exit.
■ F-3: Time display
current system time circularly.
■ F-4: Contract number display
user's contract number circularly.
■ F-5: Running times display
elevator running times circularly.
■ F-6: Door open/close control
After you enter the F-6 menu by pressing the PRG, UP or SET key, the LEDs display "1-
1". The UP and SET keys are used as the door open button and the door close button
respectively. You can press the PRG key to exit.
■ F-7: Floor auto-tuning command input
You can press the UP key to change the parameter value within the range from 0 to 2,
where both 1 and 2 indicate the floor auto-tuning command (1: Leveling adjustment
parameters in group Fr not cleared; 2: Leveling adjustment parameters in group Fr
cleared). If you select 1 or 2 and press the SET key, shaft auto-tuning is implemented
when the conditions are met. Meanwhile, the display switches to the F-0 menu. After
shaft auto-tuning is complete, F-7 restores to 0 automatically. If shaft auto-tuning
conditions are not met, Err35 is reported.
■ F-8: Test function
The setting values of F-8 are as follows:
1 Hall call forbidden
2 Door open forbidden
3 Overload forbidden
- 112 -
4 Limit switches disabled
6 Slip experiment
7 Manual UCMP test
8 Manual braking force test
After the setting is complete, press the SET key. The LEDs display "E88" and flash,
indicating the elevator is under test. When you press the PRG key to exit, F-8 restores to
0 automatically.
■ F-9: Reserved
■ F-A: Auto-tuning
After you enter the F-A menu by pressing the PRG, UP or SET key, the LEDs display "0".
The setting range of F-A is 0 to 2, described as follows:
1 With-load auto-tuning
2 No-load auto-tuning
After the setting is complete, press the SET key to save it. The LEDs display "TUNE",
and the elevator enters the auto-tuning state. After confirming that the safe running
conditions are met, press the SET key again to start motor auto-tuning.
After the auto-tuning is complete, the LEDs display the current angle for 2s and switch
to the F-0 menu automatically. You can press the PRG key to exit the auto-tuning state.
■ F-b: CTB state display
After you enter the F-b menu by pressing the PRG, UP or SET key, the LEDs display the
input/output state of the CTB. The following figure shows the meaning of each segment.
Segment ON: Signal active

Segment OFF: Signal inactive
- 113 -
1 2 3
A Light curtain 1 input Light-load Door open 1 output
B Light curtain 2 input - Door close 1 output
Forced door close 1

C Door open limit 1 input -
output
D Door open limit 2 input - Door open 2 output
E Door close limit 1 input - Door close 2 output
Forced door close 2

F Door close limit 2 input -
output
G Full-load input - Up arrival gong output
DP Overload input - Down arrival gong output
■ F-C: Elevator direction change

Note: Do not modify F-C randomly. The function of F-C is the same as that of F2-10
(Elevator running direction).
0: Running direction unchanged
1: Running direction reversed
■ F-d: Emergency and test operating panel trigger
After you enter the F-d menu by pressing the PRG, UP or SET key, the LEDs display the
trigger state of the emergency and test operating panel. The following figure shows the
meaning of each segment.
FAB: Up running arrow

EDC: Down running arrow
G: Door zone signal
Speed display
The system automatically displays this interface in the emergency evacuation, 12 V

supply or shorting stator braking (for PMSM) state.
- 114 -
◆◆ When the elevator speed is below 1 m/s, the LEDs display ".xx m/s".
◆◆ When the elevator speed is above 1 m/s, the LEDs display "x.x m/s".
NOTE
6.2 Operating Panel Parameters

The parameters adopt a three-level menu.
■ Level I menu: parameter group
■ Level II menu: parameter No.
■ Level III menu: parameter setting value
Table 6-1 Meaning of each column in the parameter table
Parameter Parameter Setting

Default Unit Property
No. Name Range
Modification
property of
Valid
Full Factory Unit of parameters
Parameter setting
name of value of measurement (whether to allow
number range of
parameters parameters of parameters modification and
parameters
modification
conditions)
" ☆ ": The parameter can be modified when the control cabinet is in the stop or running
state.
" ★ ": The parameter cannot be modified when the control cabinet is running.
" ● ": The parameter is the measured value and cannot be modified.
The system automatically checks the modification property of all parameters to prevent
misoperation.
6.3 Parameter Groups
After pressing and then / on the LED operating panel, you can view the
parameter groups. They are classified as follows:
F0 Basic parameters F9 Time parameters
F1 Motor parameters FA Keypad setting parameters
- 115 -
F2 Vector control parameters Fb Door function parameters
F3 Running control parameters FC Protection function parameters
F4 Floor parameters Fd Communication parameters
F5 Terminal function parameters FE Display setting parameters
F6 Basic elevator parameters FF Factory parameters (reserved)
F7 Test function parameters FP User parameters
F8 Enhanced function parameters Fr Leveling adjustment parameters
6.4 Parameter Table
Group F0: Basic parameters
Parameter Parameter
Setting Range Default Unit Property
No. Name
0: SVC
F0-00 Control mode 1: FVC 1 - ★
2: V/f control
0: SVC, mainly applied to special working conditions of synchronous motors (used only by
professional technicians, not described in this guide). The encoder is not required.
1: FVC, mainly applied to the normal running under distance control. The encoder is required.
2: S
ensorless V/f control, applied to equipment detection scenarios (fixed ratio between
the voltage and the frequency, simple control, and poor low-frequency output torque
characteristics). The encoder is not required.
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Command
0: Operating panel control
F0-01 source 1 - ★
1: Distance control
selection
- 116 -
F0-01 is used to set the source of running commands and running speed references, as
described in the following table.
Running Working Mode

Value Application Remarks
Mode X Input Y Output
No output
The control cabinet is
(During
operated by pressing
motor auto-
the RUN and STOP keys
tuning, Applies only
Operating X input on the LED operating
the relay to motor test
0 panel signals not panel, and the running
controlling or no-load
control detected speed is set by F0-
the RUN auto-tuning.
02 (Running speed
contactor
under operating panel
has an
control).
output.)
1. During inspection,
the elevator runs at
the speed set in F3-11
(Inspection speed).
2. During normal
running, the control
system automatically
Used during
X input computes the speed
Distance normal
1 signals Output (within the rated
control elevator
detected elevator speed) and
running.
running curve for the
elevator based on the
distance between the
current floor and the
destination floor, and
it implements direct
travel ride.
Parameter
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Unit Property
No.
Running speed
F0-02 under operating 0.050 to F0-04 0.050 m/s ☆
panel control
- 117 -
Parameter
No.
Maximum running
F0-03 0.250 to F0-04 1.600 m/s ★
speed
F0-04 Rated speed 0.250–4.000 1.600 m/s ★
F0-02 is used to set the running speed in the operating panel control mode.
F0-03 indicates the actual running speed of the elevator within the range of F0-04. For
example, the rated speed of an elevator (F0-04) is 0.500 m/s, but the actual maximum running
speed of the elevator is 0.400 m /s. In this case, set F0-03 to 0.400 m/s.
F0-04 is used to set the nominal rated speed of the elevator. Its value depends on the
elevator's machinery and the traction machine.
Parameter
No.
F0-05 Rated load 300–9999 1000 kg ★
Maximum
F0-06 F1-04 to 99.00 50.00 Hz ★
frequency
F0-07 Carrier frequency 0.5–16.0 6.0 kHz ★
Group F1: Motor Parameters
Parameter
No.
0: Sin/Cos encoder
(synchronous motor)
1: UVW encoder
(synchronous motor)
2: ABZ encoder
F1-00 Encoder type 0 - ★
(asynchronous motor)
3: ECN413/1313 absolute
encoder
4: Weton communication
encoder
Set F1-00 to a proper value according to the type of the encoder used together with the motor.
- 118 -
Parameter
No.
Rated motor Model

F1-01 0.7–75.0 kW ★
power dependent
Rated motor Model

F1-02 0–600 V ★
voltage dependent
Rated motor Model

F1-03 0.00–655.00 A ★
current dependent
Rated motor Model

F1-04 0.00 to F0-06 Hz ★
frequency dependent
Rated motor Model

F1-05 0–3000 RPM ★
speed dependent
Encoder
initial angle
F1-06 0.0–359.9 0 ° ★
(synchronous
motor)
Encoder angle
at power-off
F1-07 0.0–359.9 0 ° ★
(synchronous
motor)
Synchronous
F1-08 motor wiring 0–15 0 - ★
mode
Current filter time

F1-09 (synchronous 0.0–359.9 0 - ★
motor)
Encoder check
F1-10 0–65535 0 - ★
selection
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-
tuning
F1-11 Auto-tuning mode 0 - ★
2: No-load auto-tuning
F1-12 Encoder PPR 0–10000 2048 PPR ★
- 119 -
Parameter
No.
Encoder
F1-13 disconnection 0–10.0 2.1 s ★
detection time
F1-11 is used to select the auto-tuning mode. The setting values are as follows:
0: No operation
1: With-load auto-tuning, in which the traction sheave can be connected to the load (car).
2: No-load auto-tuning, in which the traction sheave must be disconnected from the load (car).
3: Shaft auto-tuning 1, with parameters in group Fr not cleared
4: Shaft auto-tuning 2, with parameters in group Fr cleared
F1-12 is used to set the encoder PPR according to the encoder nameplate. When it is set to
2048, the encoder must be a Weton communication encoder.
F1-13 is used to set the time that the encoder disconnection fault lasts before it is detected.
After the elevator starts running at non-zero speed, the system reports the encoder fault and
the elevator stops running if there is no encoder signal input within the time set in F1-13. If F1-
13 is smaller than 0.5s, this function is inactive.
Parameter
No.
Asynchronous
Model
F1-14 motor stator 0.000–30.000 Ω ★
dependent
resistance
Asynchronous
Model
F1-15 motor rotor 0.000–30.000 Ω ★
dependent
resistance
Asynchronous
Model
F1-16 motor leakage 0.00–300.00 mH ★
dependent
inductance
Asynchronous
Model
F1-17 motor mutual 0.1–3000.0 mH ★
dependent
inductance
Asynchronous
Model
F1-18 motor no-load 0.01–300.00 A ★
dependent
current
- 120 -
These parameters are obtained through asynchronous motor auto-tuning. After motor auto-
tuning is complete, the parameter values are updated automatically. If motor auto-tuning
cannot be performed on-site, manually enter the parameter values of the motor with same
nameplate.
Each time the rated power (F1-01) of asynchronous motor is modified, these parameters
automatically restore to the standard default values.
Parameter
No.
Synchronous motor
F1-19 Q-axis inductance 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
(torque)
Synchronous motor
F1-20 D-axis inductance 0.00–650.00 3.00 mH ★
(excitation)
Back EMF
F1-21 0–65535 0 - ★
coefficient
Bit1 = 1, Bit2 = 0: Semi-

automatic angle-free
Auto-tuning auto-tuning
F1-22 0 - ★
function selection Bit1 = 1, Bit2 = 1:
Automatic angle-free
auto-tuning
Bit1 and Bit2 are used to select the angle-free auto-tuning mode for the synchronous motor.
Bit1 = 1, Bit2 = 0: Semi-automatic angle-free auto-tuning
After the power fails and then is restored, the system automatically performs encoder angle
auto-tuning only during trial inspection running. After the auto-tuning succeeds, the system
will not perform auto-tuning again before the next power failure.
◆◆ During trial inspection running, if a power failure occurs before the auto-
tuning is complete, power on the system again. When the elevator enters
NOTE the normal state, the system reports Err19.
Bit1 = 1, Bit2 = 1: Automatic angle-free auto-tuning
After the power fails and then is restored, the system automatically performs encoder angle
auto-tuning during inspection/normal-speed running. After the auto-tuning succeeds, the
system will not perform auto-tuning again before the next power failure.
- 121 -
Parameter
No.
Bit0: Position lock slow

startup
Bit1: Speed control slow
Function selection
F1-23 startup 0 - ★
1
Bit3: Fan control mode
Bit14: Auto-tuning of UV
gain deviation coefficient
Function selection
F1-24 Bit5: Pre-torque function 0 - ★
2
0: Asynchronous motor
F1-25 Motor type 1 - ★
1: Synchronous motor
For F1-23, Bit0 is active only when a Sin/Cos or Weton communication encoder and
permanent magnet motor are used under FVC.
Bit1 = 1: Enables the speed control slow startup
Bit3 = 1: Enables the fan when the temperature exceeds 52° C; Bit3 = 0: By default, the fan
works during running.
Bit14 = 1: During auto-tuning, the system learns the UV gain deviation correction coefficient.
Group F2: Vector Control Parameters
Parameter
No.
Speed loop
F2-00 0–100 40 - ★
proportional gain 1
Speed loop integral

F2-01 0.01–10.00 0.60 s ★
time 1
Switchover
F2-02 0.00 to F2-05 2.00 Hz ★
frequency 1
Speed loop
F2-03 0–100 35 - ★
proportional gain 2
Speed loop integral

F2-04 0.01–10.00 0.80 s ★
time 2
Switchover
F2-05 F2-02 to F0-06 5.00 Hz ★
frequency 2
F2-00 and F2-01 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is smaller than
- 122 -
switchover frequency 1 (F2-02).
F2-03 and F2-04 are PI regulation parameters when the running frequency is larger than
switchover frequency 2 (F2-05).
If the running frequency is between switchover frequency 1 (F2-02) and switchover frequency
2 (F2-05), the speed loop PI parameters are the weighted average value of the two groups of
PI parameters (F2-00 and F2-01, F2-03 and F2-04), as shown in the following figure.
PI parameter
F2-00
F2-01
F2-03
F2-04
Frequency reference
F2-02 F2-05
Figure 6-2 Relationship between the running frequency and PI parameters
You can adjust the dynamic response characteristics of the speed loop in vector control by
setting the proportional gain and integral time of the speed regulator. To achieve a faster
system response, increase the proportional gain or reduce the integral time. Be aware that
this may lead to system oscillation.
The recommended adjustment method is as follows:
If the default setting cannot meet the requirements, make fine adjustments: 1) Decrease the
proportional gain to make sure that the system does not oscillate; 2) Reduce the integral time
to make sure that the system has a quick response while maintaining a small overshoot.
If both F2-02 (Switchover frequency 1) and F2-05 (Switchover frequency 2) are 0, only F2-03
(Speed loop proportional gain Kp2) and F2-04 (Speed loop integral time Ti2) are effective.
Parameter
No.
Current loop
F2-06 10–500 60 - ★
proportional gain
Current loop
F2-07 10–500 30 - ★
integral gain
F2-06 and F2-07 are the regulation parameters for the torque axis current loop.
◆◆ The two parameters are used as the torque axis current regulator in
vector control. The optimum values matching the motor characteristics
are obtained through motor auto-tuning. Generally, you need not modify
NOTE
these parameters.
- 123 -
Parameter
No.
F2-08 Torque upper limit 0.0–200.0 200.0 % ★
0: Running direction
Elevator running unchanged
F2-10 0 - ★
direction 1: Running direction
reversed
You can modify F2-10 to reverse the motor running direction without changing the motor
wiring. After motor auto-tuning succeeds, check whether the actual motor running direction
is consistent with the inspection command direction during first-time inspection running. If
not, change the motor running direction by setting F2-10.
Pay attention to the setting of this parameter when restoring the factory parameters.
Parameter
No.
Position lock
F2-11 2.0–50.0 15.0 % ★
current coefficient
Position lock speed

F2-12 0.00–2.00 0.500 - ★
loop Kp
Position lock speed

F2-13 0.00–2.00 0.600 - ★
loop Ti
F2-11, F2-12, and F2-13 are used to adjust the automatic pre-torque compensation when the
no-load-cell function is enabled. You can enable the no-load-cell startup function by setting
F8-01 (Pre-torque selection) to 2 or 3.
Decrease these parameters properly in the case of car lurch at startup, and increase them
properly in the case of rollback at startup.
Parameter
No.
Torque acceleration
F2-16 1–500 1 ms ★
time
Torque
F2-17 1–3000 350 ms ★
deceleration time
F2-16 and F2-17 are used to set the acceleration and deceleration time of the torque current.
At stop, due to the differences of motor characteristics:
- 124 -
① If a clash occurs when the current increases from zero at startup, increase the value of F2-
16 to eliminate the abnormal sound.
② If a clash occurs when the current decreases to zero at stop, increase the value of F2-17 to
eliminate the abnormal sound.
Parameter
No.
Startup
F2-18 0.000–1.500 0.000 s ★
acceleration time
This function applies only to positive drive motors without gearbox. Set a proper pre-torque
to improve the riding comfort at startup.
Group F3: Running Control Parameters
Parameter
No.
F3-00 Startup speed 0.000–0.050 0.000 m/s ★
Startup speed
F3-01 0.000–5.000 0.000 s ★
holding time
F3-00 and F3-01 are used to set the startup speed and startup speed holding time of the
system respectively.
Proper setting of these parameters may reduce the terrace feeling at startup caused by static
friction between guide rails and guide shoes.
Parameter
No.
F3-02 Acceleration rate 0.200–1.500 0.700 m/s2 ★
Acceleration start
F3-03 0.300–4.000 1.500 s ★
jerk time
Acceleration end
F3-04 0.300–4.000 1.500 s ★
jerk time
F3-02, F3-03, and F3-04 are used to set the running curves during acceleration, as shown in
Figures 6-3 and 6-4.
F3-02 is the acceleration rate of the elevator speed curve (constant acceleration phase).
F3-03 is the time for the acceleration rate to increase from zero to the value set in F3-02. The
larger the value is, the smoother the speed curve (increasing acceleration phase) is.
- 125 -
F3-04 is the time for the acceleration rate to decrease from the value set in F3-02 to zero. The
larger the value is, the smoother the speed curve (decreasing acceleration phase) is.
Parameter
No.
F3-05 Deceleration rate 0.200–1.500 0.700 m/s2 ★
Deceleration end
F3-06 0.300–4.000 1.500 s ★
jerk time
Deceleration start
F3-07 0.300–4.000 1.500 s ★
jerk time
F3-05, F3-06, and F3-07 are used to set the running curves during deceleration, as shown in
Figures 6-3 and 6-4.
F3-05 is the deceleration rate of the elevator speed curve (constant deceleration phase).
F3-06 is the time for the deceleration rate to decrease from the value set in F3-05 to zero. The
larger the value is, the smoother the speed curve (decreasing deceleration phase) is.
F3-07 is the time for the deceleration rate to increase from zero to the value set in F3-05. The
larger the value is, the smoother the speed curve (increasing deceleration phase) is.
Figure 6-3 shows the settings of the speed curve.
F3-02 (F3-05) is the acceleration (deceleration) rate of the S-curve in the linear acceleration
process.
F3-03 (F3-07) is the time for the acceleration (deceleration) rate to increase from zero to the
value set in F3-02 (F3-05) in the start jerk segment. The larger the value is, the smoother the
jerk is.
F3-04 (F3-06) is the time for the acceleration (deceleration) rate to decrease from the value set
in F3-02 (F3-05) to zero in the end jerk segment. The larger the value is, the smoother the jerk
is.
Speed (v)
F3-09
F3-04 F3-07
F3-02 F3-05
F3-06
F3-03
F3-01
F3-00
Time (t)
Figure 6-3 Speed curve
- 126 -
Acceleration rate (a)

F3-02
F3-07 F3-06
F3-03 F3-04
Time (t)
F3-05
Figure 6-4 Acceleration/Deceleration curve
Parameter
No.
Special
F3-08 0.200–1.500 0.900 m/s2 ★
deceleration rate
F3-08 is used to set the deceleration rate when the elevator has a level 4 fault or in the
inspection, shaft auto-tuning, re-leveling, and terminal floor verification state.
This parameter is disabled during normal running. It is enabled only when the elevator
position or the slow-down signal is abnormal, preventing the top-hitting or bottom-clashing
to the maximum.
Parameter
No.
Pre-deceleration
F3-09 0–90.0 0.0 mm ★
distance
F3-09 is used to set the pre-deceleration distance of the elevator, as shown in Figure 6-3. This
function is used for eliminating the influence of encoder signal loss or leveling signal delay.
Parameter
No.
F3-10 Re-leveling speed 0.020–0.080 0.040 m/s ★
F3-10 is used to set the elevator speed during re-leveling.
It is effective only when the re-leveling function (set in FE-32) is achieved using the ADO
module (MCTC-SCB-A/D/D4/A4).
- 127 -
Parameter
No.
F3-11 Inspection speed 0.100–0.630 m/s 0.250 m/s m/s ★
F3-11 is used to set the elevator speed in the inspection state.
Parameter
No.
Position of up slow-
F3-12 0.00–300.00 0.00 m ★
down switch
Position of down
F3-13 0.00–300.00 0.00 m ★
slow-down switch
Zero-speed current
F3-18 0.200–1.000 0.200 s ★
output time
Holding time of
zero-speed torque
F3-19 0.000–2.000 0.600 s ★
current upon brake
release
Running
F3-20 completion delay 0.000–1.000 0.300 s ★
time
F3-18, F3-19, and F3-20 are used to set the zero-speed current output holding time and the
braking action delay.
F3-18 is the time interval between the RUN contactor output and the brake contactor output,
during which the control cabinet performs excitation on the motor and outputs zero-speed
current with large startup torque.
F3-19 is the time that the system maintains the zero-speed torque current output from the
moment when it sends a brake release command to prevent rollback.
F3-20 is the zero-speed current output time after the running curve ends.
The following figure shows the running timing.
- 128 -
Speed (v) F3-20

F3-19
F8-11
F3-18 F2-17
RUN contactor Time (t)

Brake contactor
Shorting door lock circuit relay
Shorting motor stator contactor
Internal running status
Leveling signal
RUN contactor feedback
Brake contactor feedback
Shorting door lock circuit relay feedback
Shorting motor stator contactor feedback
Figure 6-5 Running timing diagram
◆◆ From the moment of sending a brake close command, the system

maintains the zero-speed torque current output in the time set by F8-11
(Holding time of zero-speed torque current upon brake close) to prevent
NOTE
rollback.
Parameter
No.
Low-speed re-
F3-21 0.080 to F3-11 0.100 m/s ★
leveling speed
F3-21 is used to set the elevator speed of returning to the leveling position at normal non-
leveling stop.
Parameter
No.
Acceleration rate
F3-22 during emergency 0.020–1.300 0.100 m/s2 ★
evacuation
Deceleration delay
F3-23 time upon hitting 0.00–10.00 0 s ★
slow-down switch
F3-23 indicates the delay that the elevator speed decreases to 0.100 m/s upon hitting the
slow-down switch during inspection, re-leveling, terminal floor verification, and shaft auto-
tuning.
- 129 -
Parameter
No.
0: Reserved
1: Slip experiment
enabled
Program function
F3-24 2: UCMP test enabled 0 - ★
selection
3 to 5: Reserved
6: Balance coefficient
auto-tuning
Elevator speed in
F3-25 0.100–0.300 0.250 m/s ★
the EEO state
Shaft auto-tuning
F3-26 0.100–0.630 0.250 m/s ★
speed
F3-26 is used to set the elevator speed during shaft auto-tuning.
Group F4: Floor Parameters
Parameter
No.
Leveling
F4-00 0–60 30 mm ★
adjustment
F4-00 is used to adjust the leveling accuracy at stop.
If over-leveling occurs at all floors when the elevator stops, decrease F4-00 properly. If under-
leveling occurs at all floors when the elevator stops, increase F4-00 properly. The leveling of
all floors will change once this parameter is modified. Therefore, if the leveling of a single
floor is inaccurate, it is recommended to adjust the position of the leveling plate at this floor
or adjust the leveling accuracy following the descriptions in group Fr. The control cabinet is
designed with advanced distance control algorithm and adopts multiple methods to ensure
the stability of direct travel ride. You need not modify this parameter in most cases.
Parameter
No.
F4-01 Current floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
F4-01 indicates the current floor where the car is located.
The system automatically modifies this parameter during running and corrects it in the
leveling position (door open limit) after the up/down slow-down switch operates.
In the leveling of non-terminal floors, you can manually modify this parameter. Make sure that
- 130 -
the parameter value is consistent with the actual floor number.
Parameter
No.
High byte of current

F4-02 0–65535 1 Pulses ●
floor position
Low byte of current

F4-03 0–65535 34464 Pulses ●
floor position
F4-02 and F4-03 indicate the absolute pulses of the current car position relative to the leveling
of the bottom floor.
The shaft position data are recorded in pulses. Each position is expressed by a 32-bit binary
number, where the high 16 bits indicate the high byte of the floor position and the low 16 bits
indicate the low byte of the floor position.
Parameter
No.
Leveling plate
F4-04 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
length 1
Leveling plate
F4-05 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
length 2
High byte of floor

F4-06 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 1
Low byte of floor

F4-07 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 1
High byte of floor

F4-08 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 2
Low byte of floor

F4-09 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 2
High byte of floor

F4-10 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 3
Low byte of floor

F4-11 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 3
High byte of floor

F4-12 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 4
Low byte of floor

F4-13 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 4
- 131 -
Parameter
No.
High byte of floor

F4-14 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 5
Low byte of floor

F4-15 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 5
High byte of floor

F4-16 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 6
Low byte of floor

F4-17 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 6
High byte of floor

F4-18 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 7
Low byte of floor

F4-19 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 7
High byte of floor

F4-20 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 8
Low byte of floor

F4-21 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 8
… … … … … …
High byte of floor

F4-98 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 47
Low byte of floor

F4-99 0–65535 0 Pulses ★
height 47
Group F5: Terminal Function Parameters
Parameter
No.
Attendant/
F5-00 Automatic state 3–200 3 s ★
switchover time
- 132 -
Parameter
No.
X1 function
F5-01 1 - ★
selection
X2 function
F5-02 0 - ★
selection
X3 function
F5-03 2 - ★
selection
X4 function
F5-04 118 - ★
selection
X5 function
F5-05 0 - ★
selection
X6 function
F5-06 38 - ★
selection
X7 function
F5-07 39 - ★
selection For the setting range, see
X8 function
※
Notes below this table.
F5-08 30 - ★
selection
X9 function
F5-09 116 - ★
selection
X10 function
F5-10 9 - ★
selection
X11 function
F5-11 10 - ★
selection
X12 function
F5-12 0 - ★
selection
X13 function
F5-13 0 - ★
selection
X14 function
F5-14 48 - ★
selection
※
Notes: Setting range of F5-01 to F5-14
01/33: Up leveling signal NO/NC 05/37: Door lock circuit feedback NO/NC
03/35: Door zone signal NO/NC 06/38: RUN contactor output feedback
02/34: Down leveling signal NO/NC NO/NC
04/36: Safety circuit feedback NO/NC 07/39: Brake control output feedback NO/
NC
- 133 -
08/40: Inspection signal NO/NC 27/59: Emergency evacuation signal NO/
09/41: Inspection up signal NO/NC NC
10/42: Inspection down signal NO/NC 28/60: Elevator lock signal NO/NC
11/43: Fire emergency signal NO/NC 29/61: Safety circuit 2 NO/NC
12/44: Up limit signal NO/NC 30/62: Shorting motor stator control

output feedback NO/NC
13/45: Down limit signal NO/NC
31/63: Door lock circuit 2 feedback NO/
14/46: Overload signal NO/NC
NC
15/47: Full-load signal NO/NC
67/99: Motor over-temperature signal NO/
16/48: Up slow-down signal NO/NC
NC
17/49: Down slow-down signal NO/NC
68/100: Earthquake signal NO/NC
Other functions:
76/108: Door 1 open input
00: Disabled
77/109: Door 2 open input
18/50: Up slow-down 2 signal NO/NC
78/110: Brake travel switch 2 NO/NC
19/51: Down slow-down 2 signal NO/NC
79/111: External fault input NO/NC
20/52: Up slow-down 3 signal NO/NC
80/112: Terminal floor verification signal
21/53: Down slow-down 3 signal NO/NC NO/NC
22/54: Shorting door lock circuit relay 81/113: Door lock 1 shorting signal NO/
feedback NO/NC NC
23/55: Firefighter signal NO/NC 82/114: Door lock 2 shorting signal NO/
24/56: Door operator 1 light curtain signal NC
NO/NC 84/116: EEO signal input NO/NC
25/57: Door operator 2 light curtain signal 86/118: Door lock bypass input NO/NC
NO/NC
Note: For the same signal, NC setting
26/58: Brake travel switch 1 NO/NC parameter = NO setting parameter +
32
Parameter
No.
F5-15 X15 function selection - 49 - ★
- 134 -
Parameter
No.
F5-01 to F5-24 are used to set the digital signals input to terminals X1 to X24. Select the
correct input parameters according to the function of input signals.
The control cabinet provides 24 low-voltage DIs (X1 to X24), three high-voltage DIs (X25 to
X27), and one AI (Ai/M). All low-voltage inputs share a COM terminal. An input indicator is ON
when 24 VDC voltage is input to the corresponding input terminal.
The following parameter values are used to set the function of multi-functional DI terminals.
If a certain function cannot be set, check whether this function has been allocated to other
terminals or is operating.
The parameter values that can be set repeatedly include:
◆◆ 04/36: Safety circuit feedback NO/NC
◆◆ 05/37: Door lock circuit feedback NO/NC
◆◆ 06/38: RUN contactor feedback NO/NC

NOTE
◆◆ 07/39: Brake contactor feedback NO/NC
◆◆ 26/58: Brake travel switch 1 NO/NC
The NO setting of each function is as follows (NC value = NO value + 32):
■ 01: Up leveling signal
■ 02: Down leveling signal
■ 03: Door zone signal

The control cabinet determines the leveling position based on the leveling switch signals. The
system supports three types of leveling configurations: single door zone switch, up and down
leveling switches, and door zone switch plus the up and down leveling switches. If three
switches are used, the system successively receives "up leveling signal --> door zone signal
--> down leveling signal" during up running and "down leveling signal --> door zone signal -->
up leveling signal" during down running. If two switches are used, the system successively
receives "up leveling signal --> down leveling signal" during up running and "down leveling
signal --> up leveling signal" during down running. If the leveling signal is abnormal (stuck or
disconnected), the system reports Err22.
- 135 -
■ 14: Overload signal

During normal use, the elevator enters the overload state when the elevator load exceeds
110% of the rated load. In this case, the overload buzzer sounds, the overload indicator in the
car lights up, and the elevator doors keep open. The overload signal becomes inactive after
the door lock is closed. If running with 110% of the rated load is required during inspection,
set F7-06 (Overload function) to 1 to enable the overload function.
◆◆ It must be noted that this function may cause safety hazards. Therefore,
use it with caution.
NOTE
It is recommended that the overload signal be set to NC input. If it is set to NO input, the
system cannot detect the overload situation when the overload switch is damaged or
disconnected. In this case, the elevator running may cause safety hazards. Similarly, it is also
recommended to set the up limit signal, down limit signal, and slow-down signals to NC
inputs.
■ 15: Full-load signal

The system considers that the elevator is fully loaded when the elevator load is 80% to 110%
of the rated load. The HCB at the main floor gives a full-load prompt, and the elevator does
not respond to hall calls.
■ 22: Shorting door lock circuit relay feedback

It is the door lock shorting feedback signal when the ADO or re-leveling at door open function
of elevators equipped with an ADO module is enabled. This is to ensure safe elevator running.
■ 31: Door lock circuit 2 feedback signal

The safety circuit is an important guarantee of safe and reliable elevator running, and the
door lock circuit ensures that the landing door and car door have been closed when the
elevator starts to run. Active feedback signals from the safety circuit and door lock circuit are
necessary to elevator running. It is recommended to set these signals to NO inputs. If they are
set to NC inputs, the system considers the signal input active when the NC signal input is not
connected. In this case, the actual state of the safety circuit cannot be detected, which may
cause safety risks.
■ 67: Motor over-temperature input signal

It is used for the motor thermal protection switch signal input. If this signal remains active for
more than 2s, the control system stops output and reports Err39 to protect the motor. When
this signal becomes inactive, Err39 is reset automatically and the system restores the normal
operation.
■ 70: Light-load signal

This signal is used for nuisance judgment when the anti-nuisance function is enabled. If
Bit2 of F8-08 (Anti-nuisance function) is set to 1, the light-load switch is used for nuisance
judgment. The load below 30 % of the rated load is regarded as a light load.
- 136 -
■ 73: Dummy floor input

A dummy floor signal is required if the running time between two adjacent floors exceeds the
minimum value of F9-02 (Running time protection) and FA-38 (Maximum floor running time
interval) due to excessive floor-to-floor distance. Otherwise, the system reports Err30.
■ 84: EEO input

a. When 08/40 (inspection signal) is allocated to input terminal X, the inspection switch
signal is transmitted to the system in the DI form. When 08/40 (inspection signal) is not
allocated to input terminal X, the inspection switch signal is transmitted to the system
through CAN communication (MCTC-CTW-A is required).
b. When the inspection or EEO switch is active, the elevator enters the inspection or
EEO state, and the system cancels all automatic running including the automatic door
operations. When the up/down signal is active, the elevator runs at the speed set in F3-26
(Shaft auto-tuning speed) in the EEO state and at the speed set in F3-11 (Inspection speed)
in the inspection state.
C. The inspection signal overrides the EEO signal. When both signals are active, the elevator
runs in the inspection state.
■ 86: Door lock bypass signal

It is the signal input when the door lock is bypassed. After the signal becomes active, the
system enters the inspection state.
■ 88: Rope gripper feedback signal input

Function "88" (rope gripper feedback signal input) is added to the MCB.
① In the normal or inspection state, the elevator reports Err67 and stops running
immediately when the rope gripper feedback signal is inactive. At the same time, the
system detects whether the UCMP fault occurs. If the car moves unexpectedly, the elevator
reports Err65 which prevails Err67.
② Reset Err67 by pressing the RES/STOP key on the LED operating panel, setting F-2 to
1 using the keypad, or making the rope gripper feedback signal remain active for 1s or
above. If the roper gripper feedback signal is inactive after the fault reset, the elevator
continues to report Err67.
Parameter
No.
F5-25 CTB input signal type 0–65535 1856 - ★
F5-25 is used to define the CTB input signal types by binary bit. Set this parameter as follows:
- 137 -
Bit Value of current Bit
Figure 6-6 CTB input signal state
After the LED operating panel enters the F5-25 interface, it displays a decimal number, the
sum of decimal values corresponding to all binary bits of F5-25 which are set to 1.
Press the Up or Down key, and the display on the LED operating panel is as Figure 6-6. LEDs 5
and 4 display the current bit, and LED 1 displays the value of the current bit. You can press the
Up or Down key to view the previous or next Bit shown by LEDs 5 and 4.
For example, you can set the CTB input signals of an elevator as follows.
Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default
Bit0 Door 1 light curtain 0 Bit8 Light-load signal (digital) 1
Bit1 Door 2 light curtain 0 Bit9 Up leveling signal 1
Bit2 Door 1 open limit 0 Bit10 Down leveling signal 1
Door operator over-

Bit3 Door 2 open limit 0 Bit11 0
temperature detection
Bit4 Door 1 close limit 0 Bit12 Door 1 safety edge 0
Bit5 Door 2 close limit 0 Bit13 Door 2 safety edge 0
Bit6 Full-load signal (digital) 1 Bit14 Reserved -
Bit7 Overload signal (digital) 0 Bit15 Reserved -
0: NC input
1: NO input
- 138 -
Parameter
No.
F5-26 Y1 function selection 1 - ★

For detailed setting
range, see ※Notes
below this table.
※
Notes: Setting range of F5-26 to F5-31
0: Disabled 14: System healthy
1: RUN contactor output 15: Emergency buzzer control
2: Brake control output 17: Up signal
4: Fire emergency floor arrival signal 18: Lighting/Fan output

feedback 20: Non-door zone stop
5: Door open by door operator 1 21: Electromagnetic lock control
6: Door close by door operator 1 22: Non-service state
7: Door open by door operator 2 23: Emergency evacuation completed
8: Door close by door operator 2 25: Rope gripper reset
9: Brake/RUN contactor output healthy 26: Braking transistor short circuit output
10: Fault state 27: Alarm filter output
11: Running state
12: Shorting motor stator contactor

control output
These parameters are used to set the signals output by terminals Y1 to Y6 of the output relay.
■ 09: Brake/RUN contactor output healthy

When the brake and RUN contactors operate properly (Err36 or Err37 does not occur), the
system sends a feedback signal for monitoring.
■ 13: Emergency evacuation automatic switchover

After the main power supply is disconnected, the controller outputs an emergency evacuation
automatic switchover signal when detecting that the bus voltage declines to a certain value.
The battery is used to power up the elevator to implement emergency evacuation.
◆◆ Only Y6/M6 can be used to realize this function because the relay needs to
be driven by the residual power of the controller after the external power
NOTE supply is cut off.
- 139 -
■ 16: High-voltage startup of brake

This signal is used for the brake that requires a low voltage to maintain the release state.
The signal output lasts for 4s to release the brake at a high voltage, and then the voltage is
reduced to maintain the brake release state.
■ 25: Rope gripper reset

Conditions of the rope gripper reset output (only need to meet either of them):
① The system does not report Err65 and Err41 5s after the first-time power-on.
② The system reports Err67 but does not report Err65. In the inspection state, the safety
circuit is disconnected (Err41 is reported) and then connected.
Requirements for the rope gripper reset output:
① The rope gripper reset output signal is active. Detect whether the rope gripper feedback
signal is also active.
a. If the rope gripper feedback signal remains active for 1s or above, reset Err67. When
the rope gripper reset output signal becomes inactive, the elevator restores the normal
running.
b. If the rope gripper feedback signal is still inactive after 22s (the rope gripper action
time), the system continues to report Err67. When the rope gripper reset output signal
becomes inactive, the elevator cannot run.
② The elevator cannot open/close the doors and run when the rope gripper reset output
signal is active.
Set Bit14 of F6-52 (Program function selection) to enable this function (disabled by default).
■ 26: Braking transistor short circuit output

Outputs when the braking transistor is short-circuited.
■ 27: Alarm filter output

In the non-inspection state, the alarm filter outputs when the system is operating or the door
open limit is reached.
Parameter
No.
CANbus and Modbus

Communication
F5-32 communication state - - ●
state
monitoring
F5-32 is used to monitor the state of CANbus communication with the CTB and Modbus
communication with the HCB.
After you enter the F5-32 interface, the LEDs indicate the current HCB communication state.
- 140 -
For the sake of description, the LEDs are respectively numbered as 5, 4, 3, 2, and 1 from left to
right. The segments are defined as follows:
25 17 9 1
30 31 26 22 23 18 14 15 10 6 7 2
29 27 21 19 13 11 5 3
28 DP 20 24 12 16 4 8
State monitoring of CANbus communication The segment No. indicates the address of
between the CTB and the MCB Modbus communication between the HCB at
each floor and the MCB.
Best Interrupted
Segment ON: Communication normal

Segment OFF: Communication abnormal
CAN communication: from strong to weak
Figure 6-7 Communication state monitoring using F5-32
Example: Communication state displayed by the LEDs
For example, if the LEDs are as follows, it indicates that Modbus communication of addresses
1, 5, 6, 7, 12, 15, 16, 18, 19, 21, 22, 23, 25, 26, and 27 is abnormal, and that of other addresses
is normal. The leftmost number "3" representing CAN communication indicates that CAN
communication suffers interference.
25 17 9 1
30 31 26 22 23 18 14 15 10 6 7 2
29 27 21 19 13 11 5 3
28 DP 20 24 12 16 4 8
Figure 6-8 Example of communication state monitoring
- 141 -
Parameter
No.
Bit4: Arrival gong disabled

at night
Bit6: Door lock
disconnected once during
switchover from the
inspection state to the
normal state
Bit7: Fault code not
Program control
F5-33 displayed on the keypad 0–65535 - ★
selection
Bit8: Door open command
canceled immediately
when receiving the door
open limit signal
Bit9: Torque output
holding at stop in the
case of abnormal brake
feedback
Terminal state Monitoring of I/O terminals

F5-34 - - ●
display (MCB) on the MCB
Terminal state Monitoring of I/O terminals

F5-35 - - ●
display (CTB) on the CTB, CCB, and HCB
These parameters are used to monitor the state of all I/O terminals of the system.
As shown in the following figure, the LEDs for F5-34 and F5-35 are respectively numbered as 5,
4, 3, 2, and 1 from left to right. The segments are defined as follows.
A A A A A
F B F B F B F B F B
G G G G G
E C E C E C E C E C
D DP D DP D DP D DP D DP
Figure 6-9 Terminal state monitoring
- 142 -
F5-34 F5-35
No. Segment Meaning No. Segment Meaning

A - A Light curtain 1
B Up leveling signal B Light curtain 2
C Down leveling signal C Door open limit 1
D Door zone signal D Door open limit 2
E Safety circuit feedback 1 E Door close limit 1
1 Door lock circuit 1
F F Door close limit 2
feedback 1
RUN contactor output
G G Full-load signal
feedback
Brake contactor output
DP DP Overload signal
feedback 1
A Inspection signal A Door open button
B Inspection up signal B Door close button
C Inspection down signal C Door open delay button
D Fire emergency signal D Direct travel ride signal
E Up limit signal E Attendant signal
2 2
F Down limit signal F Direction change signal
Independent running
G Overload signal G
signal
DP Full-load signal DP
signal
A Up slow-down 1 signal A Door open output 1
B Down slow-down 1 signal B Door close output 1
C Up slow-down 2 signal C Door lock signal
D Down slow-down 2 signal D Door open output 2
E Up slow-down 3 signal E Door close output 2
3 3
F Down slow-down 3 signal F Door lock signal
Shorting door lock circuit
G G Up arrival gong
relay output feedback
DP DP Down arrival gong
signal
- 143 -
F5-34 F5-35
No. Segment Meaning No. Segment Meaning

Door operator 1 light
A A Door open button display
curtain
Door operator 2 light
B B Door close button display
curtain
Brake contactor output Door open delay button
C C
feedback 2 display
Non-door zone stop
4 D UPS input 4 D
output
E Elevator lock input E Reserved
F Safety circuit feedback 2 F Buzzer output
Synchronous motor self-
G G Reserved
locking feedback
Door lock circuit
DP DP Energy saving sign
feedback 2
System light curtain state
A Reserved A
1
System light curtain state
B RUN contactor output B
2
Hall call elevator lock
C Brake contactor output C
input
5 Shorting door lock circuit 5 Hall call fire emergency
D D
relay output input
Fire emergency floor
E E Full-load signal
arrival signal
F - F Overload signal
G - G -
DP - DP -
Parameter
No.
0: MCB digital input

Load cell input 1: CTB digital input
F5-36 - - -
selection 2: CTB analog input
3: MCB analog input
- 144 -
Parameter
No.
X25 function 0: Disabled

F5-37 4 - ★
selection 1 to 3: Reserved
X26 function 4: Safety circuit signal
F5-38 7 - ★
selection 5: Door lock circuit signal
6: Door lock circuit signal 2
X27 function
F5-39 7: Door lock 1 shorting 5 - ★
selection
signal
X28 function 8: Door lock 2 shorting

F5-40 signal 0 - ★
selection
Group F6: Basic Elevator Parameters
Parameter
No.
Top floor of the

F6-00 F6-01 to 48 9 - ★
elevator
Bottom floor of the

F6-01 1 to F6-00 1 - ★
elevator
The two parameters are used to set the top floor and bottom floor of the elevator, which are
determined by the number of leveling plates installed.
Parameter
No.
F6-02 Parking floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
Fire emergency
F6-03 F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
floor
F6-04 Elevator lock floor F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
After entering the elevator lock state, the elevator returns to the floor set in F6-04.
In the automatic running state, when the elevator lock switch operates or the preset elevator
lock time is reached, the elevator clears all hall calls registered, responds to all car calls
registered, and returns to the elevator lock floor. After arrival, it stops running and turns off
the lighting and fan in the car. The hall call display is turned off after door close.
- 145 -
Parameter
No.
F6-05 Service floors 0–65535 65535 - ★
F6-05 is used to set the service floors among floors 1 to 9.
The 16 binary bits of this parameter respectively correspond to 16 floors. If a bit is set to 1, the
elevator will respond to the calls at this floor. If this bit is set to 0, the elevator will not respond
to the calls at this floor.
Set the value of these bits one by one. Convert the binary values to decimal values and then
set the sum of decimal values using the LED operating panel, as shown in the following figure.
Binary Bit Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Decimal value 32768 16384

Meaning of binary values
8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Floor 1
Bit0 0: Floor 1 not in service
1 1: Floor 1 in service
Floor 2Bit1 0: Floor 2 not in service
Floor 3 Bit2 0: Floor 3 not in service
1: Floor 13 in service
Floor number 4096
indicated by 8192 1: Floor 14 in service
each bit 16384 1: Floor 15 in service
Convert the binary values to decimal values

and then set the sum of decimal values
using the LED operating panel.
Figure 6-10 Converting binary values to decimal values
- 146 -
Example:
For a 16-floor elevator, if it does not respond to the calls at floors 2, 8, 9, and 12, set Bit1, Bit7,
Bit8, and Bit11 to 0 and other bits to 1, as shown in the following figure.
Binary Bit Bit15 Bit14 Bit13 Bit12 Bit11 Bit10 Bit9 Bit8 Bit7 Bit6 Bit5 Bit4 Bit3 Bit2 Bit1 Bit0
Decimal value 32768 16384 8192 4096 2048 1024 512 256 128 64 32 16 8 4 2 1
Floor 1
Bit0=1
1
Floor 2 Bit1=0
No response
0
Floor 3 Bit2=1
4
Floor 4 Bit3=1
8
Floor 5 Bit4=1
16
Floor 6 Bit5=1
32
Floor 7 Bit6=1
64
Floor 8 Bit7=0
No response
0
Floor 9 Bit8=0
No response
0
Floor 10 Bit9=1
512
Floor 11 Bit10=1
1024
Floor 12 Bit11=0
No response
0
Floor 13 Bit12=1
4096
Floor number Floor 14 Bit13=1
8192
indicated by Floor 15 Bit14=1
16384
each bit
Floor 16 Bit15=1
32768
Convert the binary values to decimal values

and then set the sum of decimal values
using the LED operating panel.
Add all decimal values to get a sum:
1 + 4 + 8 + 16 + 32 + 64 + 512 + 1024 + 4096 + 8192 + 16384 + 32768 = 63101
Then, set F6-05 (Service floors) to 63101.
- 147 -
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Bit0: Dispersed waiting

Bit3: Parallel control
implemented at CAN2
Bit4: Group control in
compatibility with NICE3000
Bit6: Clearing the floor
number and display direction
in advance
Program
F6-09 Bit8: Hall call implemented 8 - ★
selection
using a single button
Bit9: Analog disconnection
not detected
Bit10: Canceling Err30
judgment at re-leveling
Bit14: Time interval detection
of safety circuit 2 and door
lock circuit 2 (1.5s)
Bit0 to Bit4 of F6-09 are used to set the parallel/group control mode.
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Leveling switch
F6-10 10–50 14 ms ★
delay
- 148 -
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Bit1: Disabling return to main

floor for verification
Bit2: Canceling auto
sequential arrange of hall
call floor addresses to be
displayed
Bit5: Output current
detection at startup of
synchronous motor
Bit6: Reversing MCB lighting
output
Bit7: Door open in the non-
door zone in the inspection
state
Bit8: Doors open and close
Elevator function
F6-11 once when inspection state 8448 - ★
selection
switches to normal state at
first-time power-on
Bit10: Buzzer not tweeting
upon re-leveling
Bit11: Customized super-
short floor function
Bit13: Err53 auto reset
Bit14: Floor display not reset
by up slow-down signal when
the super-short floor function
is enabled
Bit15: Floor display not reset
by down slow-down signal
when the super-short floor
function is enabled
F6-12 VIP floor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
F6-13 Security floor 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
F6-13 is used to set the security floor.
During the night security period or when the security signal is active, the elevator runs to
the security floor first and opens and closes the doors once every time before it goes to the
destination floor.
- 149 -
Enter the security state in either of the following methods:
① Set FD-07 (HCB-JP1 input selection) or FD-08 (HCB-JP2 input selection) to 5. When the
security signal is active, the elevator enters the security state.
② Set Bit5 of FE-32 (Elevator function selection 1) to 1 to enable the night security floor
function. The elevator enters the security state from 22:00 to 06:00.
Parameter
No.
Start time of down

F6-14 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
collective selective 1
End time of down

F6-15 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
Start time of down

F6-16 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
End time of down

F6-17 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
F6-14 to F6-17 define the time range of down collective selective 1 and down collective
selective 2, within which the elevator responds only to down calls.
◆◆ To enable the peak service of down collective selective, set Bit6 of FE-32
NOTE (Elevator function selection 1) to 1.
Parameter
No.
Start time of time-

F6-18 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
based floor service 1
End time of time-

F6-19 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
Service floor 1 of
F6-20 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 1
Service floor 2 of
F6-21 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 1
- 150 -
Parameter
No.
Service floor 3 of
service 1
Start time of time-

F6-22 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
End time of time-

F6-23 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
Service floor 1 of
service 2
Service floor 2 of
F6-25 time-based floor 0–65535 65535 - ☆
service 2
Service floor 3 of
service 2
These parameters set the time range and service floors of time-based floor service 1 and time-
based floor service 2.
Service floors 1, 2, and 3 correspond to floors 1 to 16, floors 17 to 32, and floors 33 to 40
respectively. In the period of time-based floor service 1 (defined in F6-18 and F6-19), for
example, the elevator responds only to the service floors defined in F6-20, F6-21, and F6-
36. The setting of time-based service floors is the same as that of service floors set by F6-05
(Service floors).
◆◆ To enable the time-based floor service, set Bit8 of FE-32 (Elevator function
selection 1) to 1. Then, you can set the time range and service floors of
NOTE time-based floor 1 and time-based floor service 2.
Parameter
No.
Peak 1 start time

F6-26 for parallel/group 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
control
- 151 -
Parameter
No.
Peak 1 end time

control
Peak 1 floor for

F6-28 parallel/group F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
control
Peak 2 start time

control
Peak 2 end time

control
Peak 2 floor for

F6-31 parallel/group F6-01 to F6-00 1 - ★
control
F6-26, F6-27, and F6-28 are used to set peak service period 1 in the parallel/group control
mode and the service floors during this period.
F6-29, F6-30, and F6-31 are used to set peak service period 2 in the parallel/group control
mode and the service floors during this period.
During peak periods, if there are more than three car calls from the peak floor, the elevator
enters the peak service state. In this case, all the car calls from the peak floor are active. The
elevator returns to this floor when idle.
◆◆ To enable the peak service for parallel/group control, set Bit7 of FE-32
(Elevator function selection 1) to 1. To disable this function, set Bit7 of FE-
NOTE 32 to 0.
Parameter
No.
Elevator lock start

F6-38 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
time
Elevator lock end

F6-39 00.00–23.59 00.00 HH.MM ☆
time
F6-38 and F6-39 are used to set the elevator lock period, during which the elevator is
automatically locked. The effect is the same as the elevator lock key switch.
- 152 -
The elevator can switch to the lock state in the following two ways:
◆◆ Set Bit5 of F6-40 to 1 to enable the timed elevator lock function.

Set the elevator lock period in F6-38 and F6-39, during which the elevator
NOTE is automatically locked.
◆◆ Set FD-07 to 1 to activate the hall elevator lock key switch.
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Bit0: Accessibility function

selection
Bit1: Software limit
Bit2: JP16 input used as rear
door selection (button)
Bit3: JP16 input used as rear
door open signal
Bit4: Opening only one door
of through-type door under
manual control
Bit5: Timed elevator lock
Bit6: Manual door
Bit9: Disabling reverse floor
number clear
Bit10: Displaying the next
Program control
F6-40 arriving floor number 2 - ★
selection 1
Bit11: Responding to car calls
first
Bit12: Car call auxiliary
command terminal used for
accessibility function
Bit13: Duplicated command
used as accessibility and
rear door functions (0: rear
door function; 1: accessibility
function)
Bit14: Car call command
duplication
Bit15: JP20 input used for
switchover to rear door
(switch)
- 153 -
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Bit2: Decelerates to stop

upon active slow-down 1
switch in the inspection state
Bit4: Buzzer tweets during
door open delay
Bit6: Canceling door open
delay
Bit8: Elevator lock at door
open
Program control
F6-41 Bit9: Display available at 0 - ★
selection 2
elevator lock
Bit10: Elevator lock in the
attendant state
Bit11: Flashing at arrival
(within the time set in F6-47)
Bit12: Door re-open upon
active door open delay
Bit13: Door re-open upon
active car call at current floor
- 154 -
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Bit1: Canceling door open/

close command at a delay
after door open/close limit
Bit2: Door lock state not
judged at door close output
Bit3: Door close output
during running
Bit4: Returning to terminal
floor for verification at first-
time power-on
Bit5: Clearing calls
immediately at elevator lock
Bit6: Electromagnetic lock NC
Program control
F6-42 output 18432 - ★
selection 3
Bit8: Canceling door open/
close limit fault detection
Bit9: Canceling scrolling
display of fault subcode
Bit10: Door open energy
saving
Bit13 = 0: SL relay on
the CTB is used for the
electromagnetic lock output
control of manual door.
Bit13 = 1: SL relay on the CTB
is used for the sound and
light alarm output control.
- 155 -
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Bit0: Calls canceled after

entering the attendant state
Bit1: No response to hall calls
Bit2: Attendant/Automatic
state switchover
Bit3: Door close at jog
Bit4: Automatic door close
Attendant
Bit5: Buzzer tweeting at
F6-43 function 128 - ★
intervals in the attendant
selection
state
Bit6: Continuous buzzer
tweeting in the attendant
state
Bit7: Car call button flashing
to prompt
Bit8 to Bit15: Reserved
- 156 -
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Bit3: Arrival gong output

in the inspection or fire
emergency state
Bit4: Multiple car calls
registered in the fire
emergency state
Bit5: Retentive at power
failure in the fire emergency
state
Bit6: Door close by holding
down the door close button
Bit7: Reserved
Bit8: Door close at car call
Fire emergency registration
F6-44 function Bit9: Hall call floors displayed 16456 - ★
selection in the fire emergency state
Bit10: Forced running in the
firefighter state
Bit11: Exiting the firefighter
state upon arrival at fire
emergency floor
Bit12: Not clearing car calls
at reverse door open in the
firefighter state
Bit13: Reserved
Bit14: Door open by holding
down the door open button
Bit15: Automatic door open
at fire emergency floor
- 157 -
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Bit0-Bit1: Direction
determining mode (00:
automatic computation of
the direction; 01: determined
by the load direction; 10:
direction of the nearest
landing floor)
Bit4: Startup compensation
(valid or not during
emergency evacuation)
Emergency
Bit8: Emergency evacuation
evacuation
F6-45 running time protection 0 - ★
function
Bit10: Buzzer output during
selection
emergency evacuation
Bit12: Shorting stator braking
mode (for PMSM) switched to
controller drive
Bit14: Exiting emergency
evacuation upon door close
limit
Bit15: Emergency evacuation
using the shorting stator
braking function (for PMSM)
Bit0: VIP enabled by hall call

at VIP floor
VIP function
F6-46 Bit1: VIP enabled by terminal 0 - ★
selection
Bit8: Number of VIP car calls
limited
Emergency
F6-47 evacuation 0.0–15.0 1.0 s ☆
switching speed
Flashing advance
F6-48 0.010–0.630 0.010 m/s ★
time
Emergency
F6-49 evacuation 0 to F6-00 0 - ★
parking floor
- 158 -
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Floor offset in
F6-50 0–40 0 - ★
parallel control
F6-50 is used when the bottom floors of two elevators in parallel control are inconsistent.
When this function is enabled, the parallel control can be implemented directly. You need not
adjust the top and bottom floors of the two elevators and perform shaft auto-tuning again.
Parameter
No.
Bit1: ADO module (MCTC-

SCB-A4/D4 ) supported
Bit6: Leveling signal input/
output through CAN
F6-52 Function selection communication 2 - ★
Bit7: Door operator over-
temperature detection
Bit8: Safety edge signal
input selection on the CTB
Bit2: Car fan and lighting

F6-53 Function selection controlled by floor buttons
on the COP
Bit2: Communication door

operator controller
F6-55 Function selection 0 - ★
Bit11: Communication
encoder
Group F7: Test Function Parameters
Parameter
No.
Car call floor

F7-00 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
registered
Up hall call floor

F7-01 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
registered
Down hall call

F7-02 0 to F6-00 0 - ☆
floor registered
- 159 -
The three parameters are used to set the destination floors during commissioning or repair.
F7-00, F7-01, and F7-02 are respectively used as the car call button, up hall call button, and
down hall call button. After the test parameters are set, the calls remain active until they are
changed to 0 or the system power is completely off once.
Parameter
No.
Random running
F7-03 0–60000 0 - ☆
times
0: Disabled
F7-04 Hall call forbidden 0 - ☆
1: Enabled
Door open 0: Disabled

F7-05 0 - ☆
forbidden 1: Enabled
0: Disabled
F7-06 Overload function 0 - ☆
1: Enabled
0: Enabled
F7-07 Limit function 0 - ☆
1: Disabled
Random running
F7-08 0–1000 0 s ☆
interval
0: Meaningless
Braking force
F7-09 1: Pass 0 - ●
detection result
2: Fail
Countdown for
F7-10 braking force 0–1440 1440 min ★
detection period
F7-09 indicates the result of braking force detection.
0: Braking force detection has not been performed yet.
1: Braking force detection passed.
2: B
raking force detection failed and Err66 is reported. The brake must be inspected after any
fault and the fault can be reset only after the braking force detection succeeds.
F7-10 is the countdown for the braking force detection period.
The default is 1440 minutes (24 hours). The braking force detection is automatically triggered
if the system receives no call within 12 hours (the stop time exceeds the energy saving time).
When the countdown is less than 10 minutes, the system clears car calls without any response
to hall calls, the doors automatically close, and the buzzer tweets. After 30s tweeting, the
system forcibly performs braking force detection once.
- 160 -
Parameter
No.
Reference value of
F7-13 0.00–99.99 0 % ●
balance coefficient
Reference value of
F7-14 brake torque upper 0–999 0 % ●
limit
Group F8: Enhanced Function Parameters
Parameter
No.
Car load ratio

F8-00 during load cell 0–100 0 % ★
auto-tuning
0: Pre-torque disabled
1: Load cell pre-torque
compensation
2: Automatic pre-torque
Pre-torque
F8-01 compensation 2 - ★
selection
3: Both load cell pre-
torque compensation
and automatic pre-torque
compensation enabled
F8-01 is used to set the pre-torque compensation mode at the startup of the elevator. Possible
values are as follows:
Load cell auto-tuning is allowed.
1: Load cell pre-torque compensation

With a load cell, the system implements the pre-torque compensation.
2: Automatic pre-torque compensation

The system automatically adjusts the startup compensation torque without a load cell.
3: B
oth load cell pre-torque compensation and automatic pre-torque compensation enabled
When automatically adjusting the startup compensation torque, the system makes a
correction together with the load cell to achieve a better startup effect on some occasions.
If F8-01 is set to 1, the system outputs a torque matching the load in advance to ensure the
riding comfort at startup. The output torque is limited by the torque upper limit (F2-08). When
the load torque exceeds the set torque upper limit, the system outputs the torque upper limit.
- 161 -
Parameter
No.
F8-02 Pre-torque offset 0.0–100.0 50.0 % ★
F8-03 Drive gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-04 Brake gain 0.00–2.00 0.60 - ★
F8-05 Current car load 0–255 0 - ●
No-load measured
F8-06 0–255 0 - ★
by load cell
Full-load measured
F8-07 0–255 100 - ★
by load cell
0: Disabled
1: Nuisance judged by load
Anti-nuisance
F8-08 cell 0 - ☆
function
2: Nuisance judged by light
curtain
Emergency
F8-09 evacuation speed 0.020 to F3-11 0.100 m/s ★
at power failure
Emergency
evacuation power 0: Motor not running
F8-10 0 - ★
supply at power 1: Motor driven by ARD
failure
Holding time of
zero-speed torque
F8-11 0.200–1.500 0.600 s ★
current upon brake
close
Bit0: Baud rate of hall call

communication
Hall call 0: 9600; 1: 38400
F8-14 communication Bit4: Energy saving of hall 1 - ☆
setting call communication
Bit9: Faint light control of
HCB buttons
- 162 -
Parameter
No.
Bit8: Baud rate of car call

communication
CAN
0: 38400; 1: 9600
F8-15 Communication 0 - ★
Bit10: Door open/close
setting
button not controlled by
the IC card
Start address of
F8-16 hall call auxiliary 0–48 0 - ★
command
F8-09 is used to set the elevator speed during emergency evacuation using synchronous
braking.
Group F9: Time Parameters
Parameter
No.
Maximum idle time

F9-00 before returning to 0–240 10 min ☆
main floor
Car energy-saving
F9-01 0–240 2 min ☆
time
Running time
F9-02 0–45 45 s ★
protection
F9-02 is used to set the running time limit for the traction machine.
During normal running, the system performs protection if the running time in the same
direction between two adjacent floors exceeds the setting of this parameter but no leveling
signal is received. This parameter is used for timeout protection when the steel rope slips on
the traction sheave.
If this parameter is set to a value smaller than 3s, it becomes ineffective.
Parameter
No.
Current
F9-03 Clock: year 2000–2100 YYYY ☆
time
- 163 -
Parameter
No.
Current
F9-04 Clock: month 1–12 MM ☆
time
Current
F9-05 Clock: day 1–31 DD ☆
time
Current
F9-06 Clock: hour 0–23 HH ☆
time
Current
F9-07 Clock: minute 0–59 MM ☆
time
Accumulative
F9-09 0–65535 0 h ●
running time
High byte of
F9-11 0–9999 0 - ●
running times
Low byte or running

F9-12 0–9999 0 - ●
times
These parameters are used to view the actual running time and running times of the elevator.
Running times of the elevator = F9-11 x 10000 + F9-12.
Parameter
No.
Maintenance
F9-13 0–99 0 day ★
notification period
It is the forced maintenance notification function.
When F9-13 is set to a non-zero value, this function is enabled and the system starts to count
the days. If there is no power-off operation during the counting and the counted days reaches
the value set in this parameter, the elevator enters the parking state and the system reports
Err08 to notify that the elevator must be maintained. In this case, the elevator cannot run. The
maintenance personnel needs to power off and maintain the elevator, after which the system
restores F9-13 to 0 and starts counting again.
When F9-13 is set to 0, this function is disabled.
- 164 -
Group FA: Keypad Setting Parameters
Parameter
No.
0–3
0: Negative display of
physical floor
1: Positive display of
Keypad display
FA-00 physical floor 3 - ☆
selection
2: Negative display of hall
call floor
3: Positive display of hall
call floor
Parameter display
FA-01 1–65535 65535 - ☆
during running
FA-01 is used to set the parameters displayed on the LED operating panel when the elevator is
running.
The running parameters corresponding to the five binary bits of FA-01 are as follows.
Bit Parameter Name Default
Bit0 Running speed 1
Bit1 Bus voltage 1
Bit2 Output voltage 1
Bit3 Output current 1
Bit4 Output frequency 1
Parameter
No.
Parameter display
FA-02 1–65535 65535 - ☆
at stop
FA-02 is used to set the parameters displayed on the LED operating panel when the elevator
stops.
- 165 -
The stop parameters corresponding to the 16 binary bits of FA-02 are as follows.
Bit Parameter Name Default Bit Parameter Name Default
Deceleration distance at
Bit0 Rated speed 1 Bit8 1
rated speed
Bit1 Bus voltage 1 Bit9 CTB input state 1
Low byte of input

Bit2 1 Bit10 CTB output state 1
terminals
High byte of input

Bit3 1 Bit11 System state 1
terminals
Bit4 Output terminal 1 Bit12 Reserved 1
Bit5 Current floor 1 Bit13 Reserved 1
Bit6 Current position 1 Bit14 Reserved 1
Bit7 Car load 1 Bit15 Reserved 1
Parameter
No.
FA-03 Current encoder angle 0.0–359.9 0.0 ° ●
FA-05 Software version (ZK) 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-06 Software version (DSP) 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-05 and FA-06 are used to view the software version of the MCB and driver board
respectively.
Taking the MCB as an example, the following section describes how to view the software
version:
Example:
MCB version: V16.00-F15.00-L01.00
When you view FA-05, the LED operating panel displays the customer No. "F15.00" for 3s first
and the master version and subversion information "16.00".
Press , and the LED operating panel displays the customized and process version
information "L01.00".
When you view FA-06, the LED operating panel displays "32.126" if the driver board version is
V32.126-L01.06.
Press , and the LED operating panel displays the subversion "L01.06".
The method of viewing FA-06 is similar to that of FA-05.
- 166 -
Parameter
No.
FA-07 Heatsink temperature 0–100 0 °C ●
FA-11 Pre-torque current 0.0–200.0 0 % ●
FA-12 Logic information 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-12 displays the elevator and door states.
As shown in the following figure, the LEDs are respectively numbered as 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 from
right to left. LED 1 indicates the door state, LEDs 2 and 3 have no display, and LEDs 4 and 5
indicate the elevator state.
Elevator state Door state
Figure 6-11 Display of elevator and door states
The following table shows the specific information indicated by each number.
5 4 3 2 1
No No
Elevator State Door 1 state
Display Display
00 Inspection state 08 Elevator lock 0 Waiting state
Idle elevator Door open
01 Shaft auto-tuning 09 1
parking state
Low-speed re- Door open
02 Micro-leveling 10 2
leveling limit
Emergency
Returning to fire Door close
03 11 evacuation 3
emergency floor - - state
operation
Firefighter Door close
04 12 Motor auto-tuning 4
operation limit
05 Fault state 13 Keypad control - -
Main floor
06 Attendant 14 - -
verification
07 Automatic running 15 VIP state - -
- 167 -
Parameter
No.
FA-13 Curve information 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-13 displays the system running curve information. As shown in the following table, LEDs 1
and 2 indicate the running curve information.
5 4 3 2 1
No No No
Curve Information
Display Display Display
Deceleration start
- - - 00 Standby state 09
segment
Linear
Zero-speed start
- - - 01 10 deceleration
segment
segment
Zero-speed Deceleration end

- - - 02 11
holding segment segment
- - - 03 Reserved 12 Stop zero-speed
Startup speed Current stop

- - - 04 13
segment segment
Acceleration start
- - - 05 14 Reserved
segment
Linear acceleration Data analysis stop

- - - 06 15
segment segment
Acceleration end 16 to Auto-tuning

- - - 07
segment 20 segment
Steady-speed Emergency
- - - 08 21
running segment running
Parameter
No.
FA-14 Speed reference 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
FA-15 Feedback speed 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ●
FA-16 Bus voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FA-17 Current position 0.0–300.0 0 m ●
FA-18 Output current 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
- 168 -
Parameter
No.
FA-19 Output frequency 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ●
FA-20 Torque current 0.0–999.9 0 A ●
FA-21 Output voltage 0–999.9 0 V ●
FA-22 Output torque 0–100 0 % ●
FA-23 Output power 0.00–99.99 0 kW ●
Communication
FA-24 0–65535 0 - ●
interference
FA-26 Input state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-27 Input state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-28 Input state 3 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-30 Input state 5 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-31 Output state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-32 Output state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-33 Car input state 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-34 Car output state 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-35 Hall sate 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-36 System state 1 0–65535 0 - ●
FA-37 System state 2 0–65535 0 - ●
Maximum floor
FA-38 running time 0–200 0 s ●
interval
FA-38 indicates the time required for the elevator to run from the bottom floor to the top floor
at normal speed. The smaller value of "FA-38 + 10s" and F9-02 (Running time protection) is
used as the reference time for motor running time protection. During running, if the leveling
signal does not change within the reference time, the system reports Err30 and the elevator
stops running.
FA-24 displays the current quality of different system communication, as described in the
following table.
- 169 -
5 3 2 1
CAN2 Modbus CAN1

SPI Communication
Communication Communication Communication
Quality
Quality Quality Quality
0 High 0 High 0 High 0 High
↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑ ↓ ↑
9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted 9 Interrupted
0 to 9 indicate the communication quality, where a larger value indicates stronger interference
and lower communication quality.
FA-26 to FA-37 indicate all the states that can be monitored, such as system I/O.
A A
F B F B
G G
E C E C
D DP D DP
Function code Signal state Each segment indicates

a function.
Figure 6-12 Input state display
As shown in Figure 6-12, the five LEDs are respectively numbered as 1, 2, 3, 4, and 5 from right
to left. They display the states indicated by FA-26 to FA-37.
LEDs 5 and 4 indicate the function codes of I/O terminals.
LED 3 indicates the state of this function (0: inactive; 1: active).
LEDs 1 and 2 display the overall state of the 16 functions included in this parameter.
LEDs 3, 4, and 5 together indicate that function 10 (Inspection down signal) is active (1). LEDs
1 and 2 indicate that functions 4 (Safety circuit feedback), 5 (Door lock circuit feedback), 6
(RUN contactor feedback), 7 (Brake contactor feedback), and 8 (Inspection signal) are also
active.
- 170 -
FA-26: Input State 1 FA-28: Input State 3
Code Function Code Function Code Function Code Function
Fire
Inspection emergency
0 Reserved 8 64 Reserved 72
signal floor
switchover
Up leveling Inspection Door 1 safety

1 9 65 73 Reserved
signal up signal edge input
Down leveling Inspection Door 2 safety

2 10 66 74 Reserved
signal down signal edge input
Fire Motor over-

Door zone
3 11 emergency 67 temperature 75 Reserved
signal
signal input
Safety circuit Up limit Earthquake

4 12 68 76 Reserved
feedback signal signal input
Door lock Rear door

Down limit
5 circuit 13 69 forbidden 77 Reserved
signal
feedback signal
RUN contactor Overload

6 14 70 Light-load 78 Reserved
feedback signal
Brake contactor Full-load

7 15 71 Half-load 79 Reserved
feedback signal
Door
Up slow-down
16 24 operator 1 0 Reserved 8 Reserved
1 signal
light curtain
Door
Down slow-
17 25 operator 2 1 Reserved 9 Reserved
down 1 signal
light curtain
Brake
Up slow-down
18 26 contactor 2 Reserved 10 Reserved
2 signal
feedback 2
Down slow-
19 27 UPS input 3 Reserved 11 Reserved
down 2 signal
- 171 -
Up slow-down Elevator lock High-voltage

20 28 4 12 Reserved
3 signal input safety signal
High-voltage
Down slow- Safety circuit
21 29 5 door lock 13 Reserved
down 3 signal 2 feedback
signal
Shorting
Shorting door
motor stator
lock circuit
22 30 contactor 6 Reserved 14 Reserved
relay output
feedback
feedback
input
Firefighter Door lock

23 operation 31 circuit 2 7 Reserved 15 Reserved
signal feedback
FA-31: Output State 1 FA-32: Output State 2
Door close by High-voltage

0 Reserved 8 16 24 Reserved
door operator 2 startup of brake
Brake and RUN

RUN contactor Up running
1 9 contactors 17 25 Reserved
output signal
healthy
Brake contactor State of fault Lighting/Fan

2 10 18 26 Reserved
output above level 3 output
Shorting door Medical

3 lock circuit relay 11 Running state 19 sterilization 27 Reserved
output output
Fire emergency Shorting motor

Non-door zone
4 floor arrival 12 stator contactor 20 28 Reserved
stop
signal feedback output
Emergency
Door open by evacuation Electromagnetic
5 13 21 29 Reserved
door operator 1 output at power lock output
failure
Door close by Non-service

6 14 System healthy 22 30 Reserved
door operator 1 state
- 172 -
FA-31: Output State 1 FA-32: Output State 2
Door open by Emergency

7 15 23 Reserved 31 Reserved
door operator 2 buzzer control
FA-33: Car Input State FA-34: Car Output State
Down
0 Reserved 8 Overload input 0 Reserved 8 arrival
gong
Door 1 light Light-load

1 9 1 Door 1 open 9 Reserved
curtain input
Door 2 light
2 10 Reserved 2 Door 1 close 10 Reserved
curtain
Forced door
3 Door 1 open limit 11 Reserved 3 11 Reserved
close 1
4 Door 2 open limit 12 Reserved 4 Door 2 open 12 Reserved
5 Door 1 close limit 13 Reserved 5 Door 2 close 13 Reserved
Forced door
6 Door 2 close limit 14 Reserved 6 14 Reserved
close 2
Up arrival
7 Full-load input 15 Reserved 7 15 Reserved
gong
FA-35: Hall State
0 Reserved 4 VIP signal 8 Reserved 12 Reserved
Elevator lock
1 5 Security signal 9 Reserved 13 Reserved
signal
Fire emergency Door close

2 6 10 Reserved 14 Reserved
signal button input
Current floor
3 7 Reserved 11 Reserved 15 Reserved
forbidden
- 173 -
FA-36: System State 1 FA-37: System State 2
Door open 1 Door open 2 Up direction

0 8 0 8 Reserved
button button display
Down
Door close 1 Door close 2
1 9 1 direction 9 Reserved
button button
display
Door open delay Door open Running

2 10 2 10 Reserved
1 delay 2 state
Direct travel ride System full-

3 11 Reserved 3 11 Reserved
switch load
System
4 Attendant switch 12 Reserved 4 12 Reserved
overload
Direction change System half-

switch load
Independent System light-

switch load
Fire emergency 2
7 15 Reserved 7 Reserved 15 Reserved
switch
Parameter
No.
Hall call
FA-46 communication 0–65535 (floors 1 to 16) 0 - ●
state 1
Hall call
state 2
Hall call
state 3
Communication
state 1 between
FA-49 0–65535 (floors 1 to 16) 0 - ●
expansion board
and HCB
- 174 -
Parameter
No.
Communication
state 2 between
FA-50 0–65535 (floors 17 to 32) 0 - ●
expansion board
and HCB
Communication
state 3 between
FA-51 0–65535 (floors 32 to 48) 0 - ●
expansion board
and HCB
These parameters display the communication state between the HCB at each floor and the
MCB.
As shown in Figure 6-13, LEDs 5 and 4 indicate the floor address, and LED 3 indicates the state
of hall call communication at this floor (1: normal; 0: disconnected). LEDs 2 and 1 indicate
the communication quality. The 16 segments indicate the communication state of 16 floor
addresses. If a LED is ON, communication is normal. If this LED is OFF, communication
is disconnected. The hall call communication quality can be viewed in either of the two
methods.
A A
F B F B
G G
E C E C
D DP D DP
Current hall call Current hall call All hall call

address communication communication states
state
Figure 6-13 Hall call communication state display
- 175 -
Parameter
No.
0: MRL monitoring board

version
1: MR expansion board
version
Version display
FA-58 2: Car expansion board 0 - ☆
selection
version
3: ARD version
4: AFE master version
5: AFE slave version
Expansion board
FA-59 0–65535 0 - ●
software version
FA-58 and FA-59 are used together to display the expansion board software version.
Example:
To view the software version of machine room expansion board, do as follows:
1) Set FA-58 to 1.
2) View FA-59 to obtain the software version of machine room expansion board. See "FA-05"
on Page 166 for the method of viewing the software version.
Group Fb: Door Function Parameters
Parameter
No.
Number of door
Fb-00 1–2 1 - ★
operator
Fb-00 is used to set the quantity of door operator. Set this parameter based on actual
conditions.
Set Fb-00 to 1 for single door and 2 for through-type door.
Parameter
No.
CTB software
Fb-01 00–999 0 - ●
version
Service floor 1 of
Fb-02 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door operator 1
- 176 -
Parameter
No.
Service floor 2 of
Fb-03 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door operator 1
Service floor 3 of
Fb-18 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door operator 1
Service floor 1 of
Fb-04 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door operator 2
Service floor 2 of
Fb-05 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door operator 2
Service floor 3 of
Fb-19 0–65535 65535 - ☆
door operator 2
These parameters are used to set the service floors of door operators 1 and 2. The setting of
door operator service floors is the same as that of service floors set by F6-05 (Service floors).
Parameter
No.
Door open
Fb-06 5–99 10 s ☆
protection time
Arrival gong output

Fb-07 0–1000 0 ms ☆
delay
Door close
Fb-08 5–99 15 s ☆
protection time
Door open/close
Fb-09 0–20 0 - ☆
times
0: Closing the door as

normal at main floor
Door state of 1: Waiting with door open
Fb-10 0 - ☆
standby elevator at main floor
2: Waiting with door open
at each floor
Door open holding

Fb-11 1–1000 5 s ☆
time for hall call
Door open holding

Fb-12 1–1000 3 s ☆
time for car call
- 177 -
Parameter
No.
Door open holding

Fb-13 1–1000 10 s ☆
time at main floor
Door open holding

Fb-14 10–1000 30 s ☆
delay time
Special door open

Fb-15 10–1000 30 s ☆
holding time
Manual door open

Fb-16 1–60 5 s ☆
limit delay
Waiting time for

Fb-17 5–180 120 s ☆
forced door close
Manual door lock

Fb-20 0–60 0 s ☆
waiting time
Group FC: Protection Function Parameters
Parameter
No.
Bit0: Detection of short

circuit to ground before
running
Program control
FC-00 Bit2: Decelerating to stop 1 - ★
selection
at active light curtain
Bit9: Mode without door
open/close limit signal
Bit0: Overload protection

Bit1: Canceling output
phase loss protection
Bit4: Light curtain
judgment upon door close
FC-01 Function selection 65 - ★
limit
Bit5: Canceling DSP
communication detection
Bit14: Canceling input
phase loss protection
- 178 -
Parameter
No.
Overload
FC-02 protection 0.50–10.00 1.00 - ★
coefficient
Overload pre-
FC-03 50–100 80 % ★
warning coefficient
Through-type door
FC-04 0–3 0 - ★
control selection
FC-04 is used to set the through-type door control mode. The possible values are as follows:
0: Door open/close on both sides if the car/hall call is active on either side
1: Door open on the same side if the hall call is active, and door open on both sides if the car
call is active
2: Door open on the same side if the hall call is active, and door open only on one side if the
car call is active (manual selection)
3: Door open on the same side if the car/hall call is active
Parameter
No.
FC-05
to Reserved - - - -
FC-10
FC-11 11th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
FC-12 11th fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ●
11th fault month

FC-13 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
11th fault hour and

FC-14 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
FC-15 12th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
12th fault month

FC-17 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
12th fault hour and

FC-18 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
FC-19 13th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
- 179 -
Parameter
No.
13th fault month

FC-21 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
13th fault hour and

FC-22 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
FC-23 14th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
14th fault month

FC-25 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
14th fault hour and

FC-26 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
15th fault hour and

FC-27 0–9999 0 - ●
minute
FC-28 15th fault code 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-29 15th fault subcode 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
15th fault month

FC-30 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
and day
16th fault hour and

FC-31 0–9999 0 - ●
minute
FC-32 16th fault code 0–65535 0 - ●
FC-33 16th fault subcode 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
16th fault month

FC-34 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
and day
... ... ... ... ... ...
FC-207 50th fault code 0–9999 0 - ●
50th fault month

FC-209 0–1231 0 MM.DD ●
and day
50th fault hour and

FC-210 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ●
minute
- 180 -
Group Fd: Communication Parameters
Parameter
No.
0: 9600
Fd-00 Baud rate 1 - ★
1: 38400
Fd-02 Local address 0–127 1 - ★
Fd-03 Response delay 0–20 0 ms ★
Communication
Fd-04 0–60.0 0.0 s ★
timeout
Re-leveling stop
Fd-05 0.00–2.00 0.00 s ★
delay
FD-05 is used to set the re-leveling stop delay. During re-leveling, the elevator decelerates to
stop after this delay timed from the moment when it receives the leveling signal.
Parameter
No.
0: Disabled
HCB-JP1 input 1: Elevator lock signal
FD-07 1 - ★
selection 2: Fire emergency signal
3: Current floor
forbidden
4: VIP signal
5: Security signal
HCB-JP2 input 6: Door close button
FD-08 2 - ★
selection input
7: Fire emergency floor
2 signal input from the
hall
FD-07 and FD-08 are the input parameters of pins 2 and 3 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB. The
settings are effective for all HCBs.
- 181 -
Parameter
No.
0: Disabled
HCB-JP1 output
FD-09 1: Up arrival indicator 1 - ★
selection
2: Down arrival indicator
3: Fault output
4: Non-door zone stop
output
HCB-JP2 output 5: Non-service state
FD-10 2 - ★
selection output
6: Door close button
indicator output
FD-09 and FD-10 are the output parameters of pins 1 and 4 of JP1 and JP2 on the HCB. The
settings are effective for all HCBs.
Group FE: Elevator Function Setting Parameters
Parameter
No.
0: Full collective selective

Collective selective 1: Down collective
FE-00 0 - ★
mode selective
2: Up collective selective
FE-00 is used to set the collective selective mode of the control system. The possible values
are as follows:
0: Full collective selective

The elevator responds to both up and down hall calls.
1: Down collective selective

The elevator only responds to down hall calls.
2: Up collective selective
The elevator only responds to up hall calls.
- 182 -
Parameter
No.
FE-01 Floor 1 display The two high digits 1901 - ☆

indicate the display code
of tens position of the
FE-02 Floor 2 display 1902 - ☆
floor number, and the
two low digits indicate
FE-03 Floor 3 display the display code of ones 1903 - ☆
position.
The relation between the
code and the display is as
follows:
FE-05 Floor 5 display 00: Display "0" 1905 - ☆
01: Display "1"
02: Display "2"
03: Display "3"
04: Display "4"
FE-07 Floor 7 display 05: Display "5" 1907 - ☆
06: Display "6"
07: Display "7"
08: Display "8"
09: Display "9"
FE-09 Floor 9 display 10: Display "A" 1909 - ☆
11: Display "B"
FE-10 Floor 10 display 12: Display "G" 0100 - ☆

13: Display "H"
14: Display "L"
15: Display "M"
Floor 11 display
16: Display "P"
to ...
17: Display "R"
Floor 30 display
18: Display "-"
19: No display
20: Display "12"
21: Display "13"
22: Display "23"
23: Display "C"
24: Display "D"
- 183 -
Parameter
No.
FE-36 Floor 33 display 25: Display "E" 0303 - ☆

26: Display "F"
27: Display "I"
28: Display "J"
29: Display "K"
30: Display "N"
31: Display "O"
FE-39 Floor 36 display 32: Display "Q" 0306 - ☆
33: Display "S"
FE-40 Floor 37 display 34: Display "T" 0307 - ☆
35: Display "U"
36: Display "V"
37: Display "W"
38: Display "X"
FE-42 Floor 39 display
39: Display "Y"
40: Display "Z"
41: Display "15"
FE-43 Floor 40 display 42: Display "17"
43: Display "19"
These parameters are used to set the display of each floor. The setting range is 0000 to 9999,
where the two high digits indicate the display code of tens position of the floor number, and
the two low digits indicate the display code of ones position.
- 184 -
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Bit2: Re-leveling function
Bit3: ADO function
Bit4: Stuck hall call cancellation
Bit5: Night security floor
function
Elevator Bit6: Peak service in down
FE-32 function collective selective mode 34816 - ☆
selection 1 Bit7: Peak service in parallel/
group control mode
Bit8: Time-based floor service
Bit9: VIP function
Bit11: Car call cancellation
Bit12: Hall call cancellation
Bit1: Door open holding upon
door open limit
Bit2: Door close command not
output upon door close limit
Elevator Bit4: Automatic reset for stuck
FE-33 function RUN and brake contactors 36 - ☆
selection 2 Bit5: Slow-down switch stuck
detection
Bit7: Forced door close
Bit15: Independent control of
through-type door
Parameter Parameter
No. Name
Highest digit
FE-52 0 - ☆
selection 1
Highest digit
FE-53 0 - ☆
selection 2
Highest digit
FE-54 0–5699 0 - ☆
selection 3
Highest digit
FE-56 0 - ☆
selection 4
Highest digit
FE-69 0 - ☆
selection 5
- 185 -
FE-52 to FE-56 are used to set the special display of floor numbers.
When the 2-digit floor display cannot meet your requirements, add the third digit display by
setting these parameters as follows:
Set the floor address that requires a special display in two high digits and the display content
in two low digits. For example, if you want floor 18 to be displayed as "17A", do as follows:
1. Set FE-18 to 0710 (displays "7A").
2. Set FE-65 to 1801, indicating that the highest digit display of floor 18 is "1".
3. Set Bit0 of F8-14 to 1.
4. Power cycle the system.
Group FF: Factory Parameters (Reserved)
Group FJ: Factory Parameters (Reserved)
Group FP: User Parameters
Parameter
No.
0: No password
FP-00 User password 0 - ☆
1–65535
0: Disabled
1: Restoring parameters
FP-01 Parameter update to factory setting 0 - ★
2: Clearing fault records
3: Clearing shaft data
Check on user- 0: Disabled

FP-02 0 - ☆
defined parameters 1: Enabled
FP-05 Contract No. 2 0–9999 0 - ★
FP-06 Contract No. 1 0–9999 0 - ★
Group Fr: Leveling Adjustment Parameters
Parameter
No.
Leveling adjustment 0: Disabled

Fr-00 0 - ★
function 1: Enabled
- 186 -
Parameter
No.
Leveling adjustment
Fr-01 0–60060 30030 mm ★
record 1
to to 0–60060 30030 mm ★
Leveling adjustment
Fr-24 0–60060 30030 mm ★
record 24
◆◆ The allowed leveling adjustment range is ±5 mm. If the adjustment value

exceeds this rang, adjust the installation position of the leveling plate first
NOTE and perform shaft auto-tuning.
The parameters in this group are used to record the leveling adjustment value of each floor.
Each parameter records the adjustment information of two floors. Therefore, the leveling
adjustment values of 56 floors are recorded in total. The following figure shows how to view
the records.
Floor 2 Floor 1
Figure 6-14 Viewing the leveling adjustment record
As shown in the preceding figure, the rightmost two LEDs and the leftmost two LEDs
respectively show the adjustment base of floor 1 and floor 2. If the displayed value is larger
than 30, upward leveling adjustment is performed. If the value is smaller than 30, downward
leveling adjustment is performed. The default value "30" indicates that there is no leveling
adjustment. The maximum adjustment range is ±30 mm.
Adjust the leveling accuracy as follows:
① Make sure that shaft auto-tuning has been completed and the elevator runs properly at
normal speed.
② Set Fr-00 (Leveling adjustment function) to 1 to enable the car leveling adjustment
function. In this case, the elevator does not respond to any hall call, automatically runs to
the top floor, and keeps the doors open after arrival. If the elevator is currently at the top
floor, it directly keeps the doors open.
- 187 -
③ Enter the car and press the top floor button once, and then the leveling adjustment value
increases by 1 mm. If you press the bottom floor button once, the leveling adjustment
value decreases by 1 mm. The adjusted value is displayed in the car. The positive number
is displayed as "Up arrow + Value", and the negative number is displayed as "Down arrow
+ Value". The leveling adjustment range is ±30 mm.
④ After completing the adjustment, press the top floor button and bottom floor button in the
car simultaneously to save the adjustment result. The car display restores to the normal
state. If the leveling adjustment is not required at the current floor, you also need to press
the two buttons simultaneously to exit the leveling adjustment state. Otherwise, car calls
cannot be registered.
⑤ Register a car call and press the door close button. The elevator runs to the next floor for
adjustment and keeps the doors open after arrival.
After the leveling adjustment is complete, set Fr-00 to 0 to disable the leveling adjustment
function. Otherwise, the elevator cannot be used.
Groups E0 to E9: Fault Record Parameters
Parameter Parameter Setting Information

No. Name Range Description
E0-00 1st fault code 0–9999 0 - ● -
E0-01 1st fault subcode 0–65535 0 - ● -
1st fault month

E0-02 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● -
and day
1st fault hour

E0-03 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● -
and minute
See "FA-
1st fault logic
E0-04 0–65535 0 - ● 12" on Page
information
167.
See "FA-
1st fault curve
E0-05 0–65535 0 - ● 13" on Page
information
168.
Speed reference
E0-06 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● -
upon 1st fault
Feedback speed
E0-07 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● -
upon 1st fault
Bus voltage
E0-08 0 to 999.9 0 V ● -
upon 1st fault
- 188 -

Current position
E0-09 0.0–300.0 0 m ● -
upon 1st fault
Output current
E0-10 0.0–999.9 0 A ● -
upon 1st fault
Output
E0-11 frequency upon 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ● -
1st fault
Torque current
E0-12 0.0–999.9 0 A ● -
upon 1st fault
Output voltage
E0-13 0–999.9 0 V ● -
upon 1st fault
Output torque
E0-14 0–200.0 0 % ● -
upon 1st fault
Output power
E0-15 0.00–99.99 0 kW ● -
upon 1st fault
Communication See "FA-

E0-16 interference 0–65535 0 - ● 24" on Page
upon 1st fault 169.
E0-17 Reserved 0–65535 0 - ● -
See "FA-
Input state 1
E0-18 0–65535 0 - ● 26" on Page
upon 1st fault
171.
See "FA-
Input state 2
E0-19 0–65535 0 - ● 27" on Page
upon 1st fault
171.
See "FA-
Input state 3
E0-20 0–65535 0 - ● 28" on Page
upon 1st fault
171.
See "FA-
Input state 5
E0-22 0–65535 0 - ● 30" on Page
upon 1st fault
171.
See "FA-
Output state 1
E0-23 0–65535 0 - ● 31" on Page
upon 1st fault
172.
- 189 -

See "FA-
Output state 2
E0-24 0–65535 0 - ● 32" on Page
upon 1st fault
172.
See "FA-
Car input state
E0-25 0–65535 0 - ● 33" on Page
upon 1st fault
173.
See "FA-
Car output state
E0-26 0–65535 0 - ● 34" on Page
upon 1st fault
173.
See "FA-
E0-27 Hall sate 0–65535 0 - ● 35" on Page
173.
See "FA-
System state 1
E0-28 0–65535 0 - ● 36" on Page
upon 1st fault
174.
See "FA-
System state 2
E0-29 0–65535 0 - ● 37" on Page
upon 1st fault
174.
E9-00 10th fault code 0–9999 0 - ● -
10th fault
E9-01 0–65535 0 - ● -
subcode
10th fault month

E9-02 0–1231 0 MM.DD ● -
and day
10th fault hour

E9-03 0–23.59 0 HH.MM ● -
and minute
See "FA-
10th fault logic
E9-04 0–65535 0 - ● 12" on Page
information
167.
See "FA-
10th fault curve
E9-05 0–65535 0 - ● 13" on Page
information
168.
Speed reference
E9-06 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● -
upon 10th fault
- 190 -

Feedback speed
E9-07 0.000–4.000 0 m/s ● -
upon 10th fault
Bus voltage
E9-08 0–999.9 0 V ● -
upon 10th fault
Current position
E9-09 0.0–300.0 0 m ● -
upon 10th fault
Output current
E9-10 0.0–999.9 0 A ● -
upon 10th fault
Output
E9-11 frequency upon 0.00–99.99 0 Hz ● -
10th fault
Torque current
E9-12 0.0–999.9 0 A ● -
upon 10th fault
Output voltage
E9-13 0–999.9 0 - ● -
upon 10th fault
Output torque
E9-14 0–200.0 0 - ● -
upon 10th fault
Output power
E9-15 0.00–99.99 0 kW ● -
upon 10th fault
Communication See "FA-

E9-16 interference 0–65535 0 - ● 24" on Page
upon 10th fault 169.
E9-17 Reserved 0–65535 0 - ● -
See "FA-
Input state 1
E9-18 0–65535 0 - ● 26" on Page
upon 10th fault
171.
See "FA-
Input state 2
E9-19 0–65535 0 - ● 27" on Page
upon 10th fault
171.
See "FA-
Input state 3
E9-20 0–65535 0 - ● 28" on Page
upon 10th fault
171.
- 191 -

See "FA-
Input state 5
E9-22 0–65535 0 - ● 30" on Page
upon 10th fault
171.
See "FA-
Output state 1
E9-23 0–65535 0 - ● 31" on Page
upon 10th fault
172.
See "FA-
Output state 2
E9-24 0–65535 0 - ● 32" on Page
upon 10th fault
172.
See "FA-
Car input state
E9-25 0–65535 0 - ● 33" on Page
upon 10th fault
173.
See "FA-
Car output state
E9-26 0–65535 0 - ● 34" on Page
upon 10th fault
173.
See "FA-
E9-27 Hall sate 0–65535 0 - ● 35" on Page
173.
See "FA-
System state 1
E9-28 0–65535 0 - ● 36" on Page
upon 10th fault
174.
See "FA-
System state 2
E9-29 0–65535 0 - ● 37" on Page
upon 10th fault
174.
These parameters record the latest 10 faults and the corresponding system states in detail.
- 192 -
7 Troubleshooting
7 Troubleshooting
7.1 Fault Levels

The control cabinet offers approximately 70 alarms and protection functions, allowing
real-time monitoring of various input signals, running conditions, and feedback signals.
Once a fault occurs, the corresponding protection function will be activated and the
fault code will be displayed on the control cabinet.
According to the severity, the faults occurring in the system can be graded into five
levels. The faults of different levels are handled in different ways. See the following
table for the solutions for each fault level.
Table 7-1 Description of fault levels
Fault
Fault State Solution
Level
Displays the fault code.
1A – The elevator running is not affected
Level 1 Outputs the fault relay action
under any working conditions.
command.
Outputs the fault relay action
2B – The advance door opening and re-
Level 2 command.
leveling functions are disabled.
Continues normal running of the
elevator.
3A – In low-speed running, the elevator
decelerates to stop at a special
deceleration rate and cannot restart.
Outputs the fault relay action
3B – In low-speed running, the elevator
Level 3 command.
does not stop. In normal-speed
Stops output and closes the brake
running, the elevator can start running
immediately after stop.
at a low speed at a delay of 3s after
stop.
- 193 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Fault State Solution
Level
decelerates to stop at a special
deceleration rate and cannot restart.
Displays the fault code. 4B – In low-speed running, the elevator
Outputs the fault relay action does not stop. In normal-speed
command. running, the elevator can start running
Level 4
In the distance control mode, the at a low speed at a delay of 3s after
elevator decelerates to stop and stop.
cannot run again. 4C – In low-speed running, the elevator
does not stop. After stop, the elevator
can start running at a low speed at a
delay of 3s.
Displays the fault code. stops immediately and cannot restart.
Outputs the fault relay action 5B – In low-speed running, the elevator
Level 5
command. does not stop. After stop, the elevator
The elevator stops immediately. can start running at a low speed at a
delay of 3s.
7.2 Fault Information and Solutions

If a fault is reported, the system will perform corresponding processing based on the
fault level. You can handle this fault according to the information provided in the
following table.
- 194 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Fault Description Possible Cause Solution Level
Code
◆◆ Check whether the motor and grounding
cables are connected correctly.
A grounding or
◆◆ Check whether the shorting motor stator
short circuit fault
contactor causes a short circuit at the
exists in the main
controller output side.
circuit output.
◆◆ Check whether motor cables have a
damaged jacket.
Motor auto-tuning ◆◆ Set motor parameters according to the
is performed motor nameplate and perform motor
improperly. auto-tuning again.
◆◆ Check whether encoder PPR is set
correctly.
◆◆ Check whether the encoder signal
is interfered with, whether the
encoder cable runs through the duct
independently or is too long, and
whether the shield is grounded at one
end.
Overcurrent
◆◆ Check whether the encoder is installed
Err02 during 5A
The encoder reliably, whether the rotating shaft is
acceleration
signal is incorrect. connected to the motor shaft securely,
and whether the encoder is stable
during normal-speed running.
◆◆ Check whether the encoder is
connected correctly and securely. For
an asynchronous motor, try to run it
in the open-loop control mode and
compare the currents in the open-loop
and closed-loop control modes to judge
whether the encoder works properly.
The motor phase
sequence is ◆◆ Exchange the motor UVW cables.
incorrect.
The acceleration
◆◆ Reduce the acceleration rate.
time is too short.
The braking ◆◆ Check whether the braking resistor and
resistor is short- braking unit are connected correctly.
circuited. Make sure that there is no short circuit.
- 195 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
A grounding or
short circuit fault
exists in the main
circuit output.
damaged jacket.
correctly.
Overcurrent whether the shield is grounded at one
Err03 during end. 5A
deceleration ◆◆ Check whether the encoder is installed
The deceleration
◆◆ Reduce the deceleration rate.
time is too short.
- 196 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
A grounding or
short circuit fault
exists in the main
circuit output.
damaged jacket.
correctly.
Overcurrent at a
Err04 whether the shield is grounded at one 5A
constant speed
end.
◆◆ Check whether the encoder is installed
- 197 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
The input voltage ◆◆ Check whether the input voltage or bus
is too high. voltage is too high.
◆◆ Check the balance coefficient.
◆◆ Check whether the bus voltage rises
too quickly during running. If yes, the
braking resistor does not work or its
model is improper.
◆◆ Check whether the braking resistor
cable is damaged, touches the ground,
The braking and is connected securely.
Overvoltage resistance is ◆◆ Check whether the resistance of the
Err05 during too large, or the braking resistor is proper based on the 5A
acceleration braking unit is recommendation in section 1.6.1.
abnormal. ◆◆ If the resistance of the braking resistor
is proper and overvoltage occurs
whenever the elevator reaches the target
speed, decrease F2-01 (Speed loop
integral time Ti1) or F2-04 (Speed loop
integral time Ti2) to reduce the curve
following error and prevent overvoltage
due to system overshoot.
The acceleration
◆◆ Reduce the acceleration rate.
rate is too large.
- 198 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
model is improper.
Overvoltage resistance is ◆◆ Check whether the resistance of the
Err06 during too large, or the braking resistor is proper based on the 5A
deceleration braking unit is recommendation in section 1.6.1.
The deceleration
◆◆ Reduce the deceleration rate.
rate is too large.
- 199 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
model is improper.
Overvoltage at a
Err07 resistance is ◆◆ Check whether the resistance of the 5A
constant speed
too large, or the braking resistor is proper based on the
braking unit is recommendation in section 1.6.1.
An instantaneous ◆◆ Check whether power disconnection
power failure occurs during running.
occurs in the input ◆◆ Check whether all the power input
power supply. cables are connected securely.
Err09 Undervoltage The input voltage ◆◆ Check whether the external power 5A
is too low. voltage is too low.
The drive
control board is ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance.
abnormal.
- 200 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
◆◆ Check whether the brake is released
The mechanical and whether the brake power supply is
resistance is too normal.
large. ◆◆ Check whether the guide shoes are too
tight.
The balance
coefficient is ◆◆ Check the balance coefficient.
improper.
◆◆ Check whether the feedback signal and
The encoder parameter setting of the encoder are
feedback signal is correct. For synchronous motors, check
abnormal. whether the initial angle of the encoder
is correct.
Controller
Err10 ◆◆ Check whether motor parameters are 5A
overload
set properly, and perform motor auto-
Motor auto-tuning tuning again.
is performed ◆◆ If this fault is reported during the slip
improperly. experiment, perform the slip experiment
by enabling the slip function set in F3-24
(Program function selection).
The motor phase
◆◆ Check the UVW phase sequence of the
sequence is
motor.
incorrect.
◆◆ Check whether the current has exceeded
The AC drive
the rated current of the AC drive when
power class is too
the elevator with no load runs at a stable
low.
speed.
- 201 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
The mechanical and whether the brake power supply is
resistance is too normal.
large. ◆◆ Check whether the guide shoes are too
tight.
The balance
coefficient is ◆◆ Check the balance coefficient.
improper.
Motor auto-tuning ◆◆ Check whether motor parameters are
is performed set properly, and perform motor auto-
improperly (the tuning again.
Err11 Motor overload 5A
elevator running ◆◆ If this fault is reported during the slip
current is higher experiment, perform the slip experiment
than normal in by enabling the slip function set in F3-24
this case). (Program function selection).
The motor phase
◆◆ Check the UVW phase sequence of the
sequence is
motor.
incorrect.
◆◆ Check whether the current has exceeded
The motor power the rated current of the motor when the
class is too low. elevator with no load runs at a stable
speed.
The main circuit
◆◆ Check whether motor cables are
output cables are
Output phase connected securely.
Err13 loose. 5A
loss
The motor is ◆◆ Check whether the motor is internally
damaged. abnormal.
- 202 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
The ambient
temperature is too ◆◆ Lower the ambient temperature.
high.
◆◆ Clean the air filter.
The air filter is ◆◆ Check whether the installation
blocked. clearances of the controller satisfy the
IGBT over- requirements.
Err14 5A
temperature The MCB does not
◆◆ Replace a compatible MCB or driver
match the driver
board.
board.
Subcode 10: The ◆◆ Check whether the displayed
NTC temperature temperature (FA-07) is 0.
detection cable is ◆◆ Check whether the NTC temperature
disconnected. sampling cable is disconnected.
Subcode 1: The ◆◆ Check whether the braking resistor and
braking resistor is braking unit are connected correctly.
Output short-circuited. Make sure that there is no short circuit.
Err15 5A
abnormal Subcode 2: The
braking IGBT is ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance.
short-circuited.
Subcode 1: ◆◆ Check whether the input voltage is too
Excessive exciting low (often exists in the temporary power
Current control current deviation supply).
Err16 5A
fault Subcode 2: ◆◆ Check whether the cables between the
Excessive torque controller and the motor are connected
current deviation securely.
Subcode 1:
◆◆ Reserved
Reserved
◆◆ Serious interference exists in the C, D,
Encoder and Z signals of the Sin/Cos encoder.
interference Subcode 2: Check whether the encoder cable is
Err17 5A
during motor The Sin/Cos routed separately from power cables
auto-tuning encoder signal is and whether the system grounding is
abnormal. reliable.
◆◆ Check whether the PG card is connected
correctly.
- 203 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 1:
Excessive
◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance.
hardware zero-
Hardware signal drift
Err18 5A
detection fault Subcode
3: Product
identification
signal fault
Subcode 1: Stator
resistance auto-
tuning fails. ◆◆ Check the motor lead wire and whether
Subcode 5: Motor output phase loss occurs.
pole position
auto-tuning fails.
Subcode 9:
The CD signal
fluctuation is ◆◆ Hardware interference exists in the CD
too large during signals of the Sin/Cos encoder. Check
synchronous whether the grounding is reliable.
motor static auto-
Motor auto- tuning.
Err19 5A
tuning fault Subcode 10: The
encoder phase
◆◆ Check whether the value of F1-08 is
sequence is
zero. Make sure that the encoder phase
not zero during
sequence is zero during synchronous
synchronous
motor static auto-tuning.
motor static auto-
tuning.
Subcode 12:
Failed to obtain ◆◆ For semi-automatic angle-free auto-
the encoder initial tuning, the elevator can run at normal
angle during speed only after obtaining the encoder
angle-free auto- initial angle in the inspection mode.
tuning.
- 204 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode
1: Encoder
signals are not ◆◆ Check the encoder signal circuit.
detected during ◆◆ Check the PG card.
synchronous ◆◆ Check whether the brake is released.
motor no-load
auto-tuning.
Subcode 4: Z
signal cannot be
detected during
synchronous
motor auto-
tuning.
Subcode 5: The ◆◆ Check the encoder signal circuit.
Sin/Cos encoder ◆◆ Check the PG card.
signals are
disconnected.
Speed feedback Subcode 14:
Err20 5A
incorrect Z signal is lost
during normal
running.
Subcodes 2 and 8:
◆◆ Reserved
Reserved
◆◆ Exchange any two phases among the
Subcode 3: The
motor UVW phases.
phase sequence
of the motor is
during synchronous motor with-load
incorrect.
auto-tuning.
◆◆ The angle of synchronous motor is
abnormal. Perform motor auto-tuning
again.
Subcode 9: ◆◆ Reduce the position lock speed loop Kp.
Overspeed ◆◆ Decrease the speed loop gain or
increase the integral time.
◆◆ Check whether the UVW phase sequence
of the motor is correct.
- 205 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
◆◆ Check whether the brake is released.
◆◆ Check whether the torque upper limit is
Subcode 10: The
too small.
torque upper limit
◆◆ Check whether the load is too heavy or
is reached, but the
whether the power class of the AC drive
speed deviation is
is too low.
too large.
◆◆ Check whether the bus voltage is too
low.
Subcode 12: ◆◆ Check whether the brake is released.
During running, ◆◆ Check whether the encoder AB signals
the torque are disconnected.
reaches the limit ◆◆ Enable the slip experiment function
and the feedback by setting F3-24 (Program function
speed is 0. selection) to 1.
◆◆ Check whether the encoder is connected
Subcode 13:
correctly or suffers strong interference
The encoder AB
and whether the brake is suddenly
signals are lost
closed due to a power failure during
during running.
Speed feedback running.
Err20 5A
incorrect Subcode 19:
The Sin/Cos
◆◆ Check whether the encoder circuit is
encoder signals
disconnected. Check whether the brake
are seriously
is stuck.
interfered with
during running.
◆◆ Check whether the encoder cable the
power cables are routed separately.
Subcode 55: The recommended spacing between
During auto- the encoder cable the power cables is
tuning, the Sin/ at least 0.1 m when they are routed in
Cos encoder parallel and at least 0.5 m when they
signals are cross.
seriously ◆ Check the encoder pin assignment
interfered with or and whether the CD signals are
the CD signals are reversed. If Bit3 of F1-08 (Synchronous
incorrect. motor wiring mode) is 1, CD signals are
reversed. In this case, change Bit3 to 0
and perform auto-tuning again.
- 206 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
◆◆ Check whether the cable connecting
the encoder is disconnected or does not
Subcode 80: The
match.
communication
◆◆ Check whether the encoder interface
encoder is
on the driver board becomes loose or
disconnected.
falls off. Try to remove and insert the
interface.
Subcode 81: ◆◆ Check whether the internal PCB of the
Overspeed at encoder is damaged, or replace the
power-on of the encoder.
communication ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance for
encoder technical support.
Subcode 82: ◆◆ Check whether the internal PCB of the
Overspeed during encoder is damaged, or replace the
operation of the encoder.
communication ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance for
encoder technical support.
◆◆ Check whether the encoder disk
Speed feedback is polluted or broken and whether
Err20 5A
incorrect the encoder signal suffers serious
Subcode 83: QEP
interference internally, or replace the
counting error
encoder.
◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance for
technical support.
◆◆ Check whether the internal PCB of the
Subcode 84: encoder is damaged, or replace the
Initial position encoder.
computing error ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance for
technical support.
Subcode 85: encoder is damaged, or replace the
M-channel analog encoder.
abnormal ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance for
technical support.
Subcode 86: The
encoder is not
◆◆ Replace the encoder.
aligned in the
production line.
- 207 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
encoder is damaged, or replace the
Subcode 90:
encoder.
Initialization
◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance for
of the
technical support.
communication
◆◆ Restore power and perform
encoder failed.
initialization. If the fault persists, contact
the manufacturer.
Subcode 91:
Shorting motor
◆◆ Check whether a short circuit to ground
stator contactor
exists, whether the motor type is set
fails during
correctly, and whether overcurrent/over-
synchronous
temperature/overload/overvoltage/
braking
overspeed occurs.
Speed feedback emergency
Err20 5A
incorrect evacuation
Subcode 92:
◆◆ Check whether F1-00 (Encoder type) and
Overspeed during
F1-12 (Encoder PPR) are set correctly.
synchronous
◆◆ Check whether F1-04 (Rated motor
braking
frequency) and F1-05 (Rated motor
emergency
speed) are set correctly.
evacuation
◆◆ Check whether the car load and
Subcode 93: counterweight are balanced.
Timeout during ◆◆ Check whether the guide shoes are too
synchronous tight, causing excessive static friction at
braking startup.
emergency ◆◆ Check whether the X and Y axes of the
evacuation car are inclined, causing increased static
friction.
- 208 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 2: The
set maximum
frequency is
smaller than
the rated motor
frequency.
Subcode 3: The
encoder type is
set incorrectly.
Subcode 5: The
motor is not a ◆◆ Check whether the set value of F1-00
Parameter
Err21 synchronous (Encoder type) matches the encoder. 5A
setting error
motor and the ◆◆ Adopt other auto-tuning modes.
encoder is not a
Sin/Cos encoder,
but synchronous
motor static auto-
tuning is selected
to auto-tune the
encoder initial
angle.
Subcode 6:
Elevator lock fault
Subcode 101: The ◆◆ Check whether the leveling and door
leveling signal is zone switches work properly.
stuck. ◆◆ Check the installation verticality and
Subcode 102: The depth of leveling plates.
leveling signal is ◆◆ Check the leveling signal input terminals
lost. on the MCB.
Leveling signal
Err22 Subcode 103: The 1A
abnormal
leveling position
check pulses
show an excessive ◆◆ Check whether the steel ropes slip.
deviation in
the automatic
running state.
- 209 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcodes 1 and ◆◆ Subcodes 1 and 2: Check whether a
2: Short circuit to short circuit to ground exists in the
ground exists. three-phase output of the AC drive.
Subcode 4: Inter- ◆◆ Check whether an inter-phase short
phase short circuit circuit exists in the three-phase output
exists. of the AC drive.
Subcodes 3 and
6: Short circuit
Err23 Short circuit ◆◆ Check whether an inter-phase short 5A
to ground exists
circuit exists in the three-phase output
(overcurrent in the
of the AC drive.
shorting motor
stator contactor).
Other subcodes:
◆◆ Check whether the braking resistor and
The braking
braking unit are connected correctly.
resistor is short-
Make sure that there is no short circuit.
circuited.
Subcode 101: The
RTC information ◆◆ Replace the clock battery.
Err24 RTC fault 3B
of the MCB is ◆◆ Replace the MCB.
abnormal.
Subcodes 101,
Storage data 102, and 103: The
Err25 ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance. 4A
abnormal storage data of the
MCB is abnormal.
Subcode 101: The
◆◆ Check whether the NC/NO feature of the
Earthquake earthquake signal
Err26 earthquake signal is consistent with the 3B
signal is active for more
MCB parameter setting.
than 2s.
Fault specific
Err27 to customized Reserved ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance. -
product
Maintenance
Err28 Reserved ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance. -
fault
Shorting motor
Err29 stator contactor Reserved ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance. 5A
fault
- 210 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
◆◆ Check whether the leveling signal
cables are connected reliably, touch the
ground, or are shorted with other signal
Subcodes 101,
cables.
102 and 103: In
◆◆ Check whether the floor-to-floor height
the normal-speed
Elevator is too large or the re-leveling speed (F3-
running or re-
Err30 position 21) is too small, causing overlong re- 4A
leveling state, the
abnormal leveling time.
leveling signal has
◆◆ Note: Subcodes 101, 102 and 103
no change within
indicate that the up leveling signal,
a certain period.
down leveling signal, and door zone
signal have no change within a certain
period respectively.
◆◆ Check whether the parameter setting
Subcode 101: and wiring of the rotary encoder are
Overspeed occurs correct.
during normal- ◆◆ Check whether motor parameters are
speed running. set properly according to the nameplate.
Perform motor auto-tuning again.
Subcode 102:
Overspeed occurs
◆◆ Reduce the inspection speed or perform
during inspection
motor auto-tuning again.
or shaft auto-
tuning.
Subcode 103:
Elevator speed Overspeed occurs
Err33 function is enabled. 5A
abnormal in the shorting
stator braking
mode (for PMSM).
Subcodes 104 and
◆◆ Check whether the emergency power
105: Overspeed
capacity meets the requirements.
occurs during
◆◆ Check whether the emergency running
emergency
speed is set properly.
running.
Subcode 106: The
◆◆ Check the wiring of the rotary encoder.
speed measured
◆◆ Check whether the SPI communication
by the MCB shows
between the MCB and the AC drive is of
an excessive
good quality.
deviation.
The logic of the ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance to replace
Err34 Logic fault 5A
MCB is abnormal. the MCB.
- 211 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 101:
When shaft auto-
tuning starts, the
◆◆ Check whether the down slow-down
elevator is not at
switch 1 is active and whether the
the bottom floor
current floor (F4-01) is the bottom floor.
or the down slow-
down switch 1 is
inactive.
Subcode 102: The
inspection switch
◆◆ Check whether the elevator is in the
is disconnected
inspection state.
during shaft auto-
tuning.
Shaft auto-
Subcode 103: It is
Err35 tuning data 4C
judged at power-
abnormal
on that shaft
auto-tuning is
not performed or
shaft auto-tuning
data is abnormal.
Subcodes 104, ◆◆ Perform shaft auto-tuning again.
113, and 114:
In the distance
control mode, it is
judged at startup
of running that
shaft auto-tuning
is not performed.
- 212 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
◆◆ Check whether the elevator running
Subcode 105: The
direction is consistent with the pulse
elevator running
change in F4-03 (Low byte of current
direction is
floor position). That is, F4-03 increases
inconsistent with
when the elevator runs up and
the pulse change.
decreases when the elevator runs down.
Subcodes 106,
107, and 109: The
◆◆ Check whether the signal feature
sensing interval
(NO/NC) of leveling switches is set
between the up
incorrectly.
leveling switch
◆◆ If the leveling switch signal flashes,
and the down
check whether the leveling plates are
leveling switch
installed properly and whether there is
and the leveling
high-voltage interference.
plate pulse length
are abnormal.
◆◆ Check whether the leveling switches are
connected correctly.
Subcodes 108 and ◆◆ Check whether the floor-to-floor
Shaft auto-
110: No leveling height is too large, causing the running
Err35 tuning data 4C
signal is received timeout. You can increase the auto-
abnormal
within 45s during tuning speed (F3-26) so that auto-tuning
auto-tuning. of the longest floor can be completed
within 45s, and perform shaft auto-
tuning again.
Subcodes 111 and ◆◆ If the height of a certain floor is smaller
115: The stored than 50 cm, enable the super-short floor
floor height is function. If not, check the installation of
smaller than 50 the leveling plate at this floor as well as
cm. the leveling switch and its wiring.
Subcode 112: The
elevator is not at
◆◆ F6-00 (Top floor of the elevator) is set
the top floor when
incorrectly, or a leveling plate is missing.
auto-tuning is
complete.
Subcode 116:
◆◆ Check the number of leveling signals
The up and down
and parameter setting.
leveling signals
◆◆ Check whether the up and down leveling
are in the wrong
switches are connected correctly.
sequence.
- 213 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 101: The
RUN contactor
has no output,
but the contactor
feedback is active.
Subcode 102: The
RUN contactor
has an output, ◆◆ Check whether the feedback contact of
RUN contactor but the contactor the RUN contactor acts properly.
Err36 feedback feedback is ◆◆ Check the signal feature (NO/NC) of the 5A
abnormal inactive. feedback contact.
Subcode 104: ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance.
When both
feedback
signals of the
RUN contactor
are enabled,
their states are
inconsistent.
Subcode 101: ◆◆ Check whether the signal feature (NO/
The output of the NC) of the brake contactor feedback
brake contactor is contact is set correctly.
inconsistent with ◆◆ Check the brake contactor feedback
the feedback. circuit.
Subcode 102: The ◆◆ Check whether the signal feature (NO/
Brake contactor states of multiple NC) of the brake contactor feedback
output brake contactor contacts are set correctly.
Err37 5A
feedback feedback contacts ◆◆ Check whether the states of multiple
abnormal are inconsistent. output feedback contacts are consistent.
Subcode 103: The
◆◆ Check whether the signal feature (NO/
brake contactor
NC) of the brake travel switch 1/2
output is
feedback contact is set correctly.
inconsistent with
◆◆ Check the brake travel switch 1/2
the brake travel
feedback circuit.
switch 1 feedback
- 214 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 106: The
brake contactor
NC) of the brake travel switch 1/2
output is
feedback contact is set correctly.
inconsistent with
◆◆ Check the brake travel switch 1/2
the brake travel
feedback circuit.
switch 2 feedback.
Subcode 105: The
brake contactor ◆◆ Check whether the brake contactor
output feedback is output feedback signal is normal.
active before the ◆◆ Check the related parameters, or contact
brake is opened at the agent or Inovance.
startup.
Subcode 104: The
states of multiple
brake travel
switch 1 feedback
contacts are ◆◆ Check whether the signal feature (NO/
inconsistent. NC) of brake travel switch 1/2 feedback
Brake contactor contacts are set correctly.
Subcode 107: The ◆◆ Check whether the states of multiple
output
Err37 states of multiple output feedback contacts are consistent. 5A
feedback brake travel
abnormal switch 2 feedback
contacts are
inconsistent.
Subcode 108:
The brake
contactor output
is inconsistent
with the feedback
of brake travel ◆◆ Check whether the signal feature (NO/
switch 1 on the I/O NC) of the brake travel switch 1/2
expansion board. feedback contact on the I/O expansion
Subcode 109: board is set correctly.
The brake ◆◆ Check the brake travel switch 1/2
contactor output feedback circuit.
is inconsistent
with the feedback
of brake travel
switch 2 on the I/O
expansion board.
- 215 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 101: The
pulses recorded
in F4-03 (Low byte
of current floor ◆◆ Check whether the rotary encoder is
position) do not used correctly.
change within the ◆◆ Check whether the brake works
time threshold set properly.
in F1-13 (Encoder
disconnection
detection time).
Subcode 102:
F4-03 (Low
byte of current
Rotary encoder floor position)
Err38 ◆◆ Check whether the parameter setting 5A
signal abnormal increases when
and wiring of the rotary encoder are
the elevator runs
correct.
down.
◆◆ Check whether the system grounding
Subcode 103:
and signal grounding are reliable.
F4-03 (Low
byte of current
elevator position)
decreases when
the elevator runs
up.
Subcode 104:
SVC is used in the ◆◆ Set F0-00 (Control mode) to 1 (FVC) in
distance control the distance control mode.
mode.
- 216 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 105: The
up limit switch
operates when
the elevator runs
down. ◆◆ Check whether the up and down limit
Subcode 106: The switches are connected correctly.
down limit switch
operates when
the elevator runs
up.
Rotary encoder
Err38 Subcode 107: 5A
signal abnormal
The up speed
changing switch
operates when
the elevator ◆◆ Check whether the up and down speed
runs down, and changing switches are connected
the down speed correctly.
changing switch
operates when
the elevator runs
up.
◆◆ Check whether the signal feature
(NO/NC) of motor parameters are set
Subcode 101:
correctly.
The motor over-
◆◆ Check whether the thermal protection
Motor over- temperature relay
Err39 relay socket is normal. 3A
temperature input remains
◆◆ Check whether the motor is used
active for a certain
properly or damaged.
period.
◆◆ Improve the cooling conditions of the
motor.
Err40 Reserved Reserved
◆◆ Check the safety circuit switches and
Subcode 101: their states.
Safety circuit The safety circuit ◆◆ Check the external power supply.
Err41 5A
disconnected signal becomes ◆◆ Check whether the signal feature (NO/
off. NC) of the feedback contact on the
safety circuit contactor is set correctly.
- 217 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
◆◆ Check whether the landing door lock
Subcodes 101
and car door lock are in good contact.
Door lock and 102: The door
Err42 disconnected lock feedback is 5A
NC) of the door lock signal detection
during running inactive during
point is set correctly.
running.
◆◆ Check the external power supply.
◆◆ Check the signal feature (NO/NC) of the
up limit switch.
◆◆ Check whether the up limit switch is in
Subcode 101: The
good contact.
Up limit signal up limit switch
Err43 ◆◆ Check whether the up limit switch 4A
abnormal operates during
is installed in a position lower than
up running.
normal, which causes this switch to
operate even when the elevator arrives
at the top terminal floor normally.
◆◆ Check the signal feature (NO/NC) of the
down limit switch.
◆◆ Check whether the down limit switch is
Subcode 101: The
in good contact.
Down limit down limit switch
Err44 ◆◆ Check whether the down limit switch 4A
signal abnormal operates during
is installed in a position higher than
down running.
normal, which causes this switch to
operate even when the elevator arrives
at the bottom terminal floor normally.
Subcode 101:
The down slow-
down distance is
insufficient during
shaft auto-tuning. ◆◆ Check whether the up and down slow-
down switches are in good contact.
Subcode 102:
The up slow-
NC) of the up and down slow-down
Slow-down down distance is
switches are set correctly.
Err45 switch insufficient during 4B
◆◆ Check whether the distance between
abnormal shaft auto-tuning.
the slow-down switch and the leveling
Subcode 103: plate of the top/bottom terminal floor
During normal meets the slow-down requirement at
running, the slow- this speed.
down switch
is stuck, or the
switch position is
abnormal.
- 218 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 101: The
shorting door lock
circuit relay has an
output, but the relay
feedback is inactive.
Subcode 102: The
shorting door lock
circuit relay has no
output, but the relay
feedback is active.
◆◆ Check whether the electrical wiring of the
Subcode 103:
MCTC-SCB is normal.
The output of the
◆◆ Check whether the parameters that define the
shorting door lock
cooperation between the MCB and the MCTC-
circuit relay lasts for
SCB are set correctly.
15s.
◆◆ Check whether the MCTC-SCB is pirated.
Subcode 201:
◆◆ Check whether the MCTC-SCB-A4/D4 works
Communication
normally.
between the MCB
and the MCTC- MCTC-SCB fault
SCB-A4/D4 is Fault Code
abnormal. Fault Description
MCTC-SCB-related (xx)
Err47 Subcode 202: The 3B
fault Software fault (CPU self-check,
manufacturer No. of
1 watchdog abnormal, control flow
the MCB and MCTC-
abnormal and so on)
SCB are inconsistent.
2 MCTC-SCB identification fault
Subcode 203: The
3 Up re-leveling signal abnormal
relay signal feedback
4 Down re-leveling signal abnormal
from the MCTC-SCB
remains inconsistent 5 Safety relay KM1 abnormal
with the close relay 6 Safety relay KM2 abnormal

signal output by the 7 Safety relay KM4 abnormal
MCB for 2s. 8 Safety relay KM5 abnormal
Subcode 209: 9 Safety relay KM6 abnormal
The encryption
authentication of the
MCB and MCTC-SCB
fails.
Subcode 210: The
self-authentication
of the MCTC-SCB
fails.
Subcode 3xx: MCTC-
SCB fault
- 219 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 101: The
consecutive times ◆◆ Check whether the door operator
that the door does system works properly.
not open to the ◆◆ Check whether the CTB output is
Err48 Door open fault 5A
limit exceeds the normal.
value set in FB-09 ◆◆ Check whether the door open limit
(Door open/close signal and door lock signal are normal.
times).
Subcode 101: The
consecutive times ◆◆ Check whether the door operator
that the door does system works properly.
not close to the ◆◆ Check whether the CTB output is
Err49 Door close fault 5A
limit exceeds the normal.
value set in FB-09 ◆◆ Check whether the door close limit
(Door open/close signal and door lock signal are normal.
times).
Subcode 101:
Stuck leveling
◆◆ Check whether the leveling switches
signal is detected
and door zone switches work properly.
three consecutive
Consecutive ◆◆ Check the installation verticality and
times.
Err50 loss of leveling depth of leveling plates. 5A
Subcode 102:
signal ◆◆ Check the leveling signal input terminals
Leveling signal
on the MCB.
loss is detected
◆◆ Check whether the steel ropes slip.
three consecutive
times.
- 220 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
◆◆ Check the communication cable

Subcode 101:
connection.
Feedback
CAN ◆◆ Check the power supply of the CTB.
data of CAN
communication ◆◆ Check the 24 V power supply of the 1A
communication
fault controller.
with the CTB
◆◆ Check whether high-voltage interference
remains incorrect.
exists in communication.
Err51
Subcode 2xx: The
manufacturer
Manufacturer number stored in
handshaking the system and ◆◆ Contact Inovance. 1A
fault that of the car
call board do not
match.
◆◆ Check the communication cable
Subcode 101: connection.
Feedback data ◆◆ Check the 24 V power supply of the
HCB
of Modbus controller.
communication 1A
communication ◆◆ Check whether there are repeated HCB
fault
with HCBs addresses.
remains incorrect. ◆◆ Check whether high-voltage interference
exists in communication.
Subcode 2xx: The
manufacturer
number stored in
Err52
the system and
that of HCBs of
the front door do
Manufacturer
not match.
handshaking ◆◆ Contact Inovance. 1A
Subcode 3xx: The
fault
manufacturer
number stored in
the system and
that of HCBs of
the rear door do
not match.
- 221 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 101: Three
seconds after door
open output, the
door lock feedback
signal is still active
when the shorting
door lock circuit
relay has no output. ◆◆ Check whether the door lock circuit is shorted.
Subcode 102: The ◆◆ Check whether the door lock feedback is
states of multiple correct.
door lock feedback
contacts are
inconsistent, or the
door lock 1 feedback
is inconsistent with
the door lock 2
feedback.
Subcode 105: Three

seconds after door
open output, the
Err53 Door lock fault door lock 1 shorting 5A
signal is active when
the shorting door
lock circuit relay has
◆◆ Check whether the door lock circuit is shorted.
an output.
◆◆ Check whether the door lock feedback is
Subcode 106: Three
correct.
seconds after door
open output, the
door lock 2 shorting
signal is active when
the shorting door
lock circuit relay has
an output.
Subcode 107: The

door lock shorting
input parameter
◆◆ Check whether the door lock shorting
is selected, but
feedback signal cable is not connected or is
the feedback
disconnected.
signal remains
disconnected or is
not connected.
- 222 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 201: AB/BC
shorting, indicating
that the front car/
landing door is
shorted.
Subcode 202: BE
that 131 and 134 are
shorted.
Subcode 203: AD
130
SO1
A
switch of door 1
Car door lock
shorted.
GS
KM1-1
Subcode 204: DE
131 DS1
B
shorted.
Landing door lock

switch of door 1
Subcode 205: BC
DS2
KM2-1
SO2
that 131 and 132 are DSn 132

shorted.
Subcode 206: CD/DE
C
RDS1
that the rear landing/

Landing door lock
switch of door 2
car door is shorted.

Err53 Door lock fault 5A
RDS2
Subcode 207: CE/AE

KM3-1
RDSn
that 132 and 134

or 130 and 134 are
D
SO3
133
shorted.
switch of door 2
Car door lock
KM4-1
Subcode 208: BD
RGS
SO4

E
134
shorted.
voltage detection
X27: Door lock high-
shorting detection
X28: Door lock 2
shorting detection
X26: Door lock 1
X25: Safety detection
Subcode 209:
controller
Elevator
KM3 cannot be
disconnected due to
a stuck fault.
Subcode 210: AC/AE
shorting, indicating Find out the fault according to the
that 130 and 132 preceding figure.
or 130 and 134 are
shorted.
Subcode 211: AE
shorted.
Subcode 212: KM3
cannot be closed due
to a stuck fault.
- 223 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
◆◆ Reduce the load.
Subcode 102:
Overcurrent When inspection
Err54 at inspection starts, the current 5A
◆◆ Set Bit1 of FC-00 (Program control
startup exceeds 120% of
selection) to 1 to disable the startup
the rated current.
current detection.
Subcode 101: In
the automatic
running state,
the door open
Stop at another limit signal is not ◆◆ Check the door open limit signal of the
Err55 1A
landing floor received within current floor.
the time set in FB-
06 (Door open
protection time)
during door open.
Subcode 101: The
door open limit
signal is active
during running.
Subcode 102: The ◆◆ Check the signal feature (NO/NC) of the
door close limit door open/close limit signal set in F5-25
signal is inactive (CTB input signal type).
during running. ◆◆ Check the connection of the door open/
Subcode 103: The close signal.
door open limit
Door open/
signal and door
Err56 close signal 5A
close limit signal
fault
are both active.
Subcode 104: The
door close limit
signal remains
connected 3s after
◆◆ Check whether the door close limit
the doors open.
signal is always active.
This fault subcode
is detected after
the door lock
bypass is set.
- 224 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcodes
101 and 102:
Communication
between the MCB
and the inverter
DSP board is
abnormal.
◆◆ Check whether the cable connection
Subcode 104: The
between the communication encoder 5A
communication
SPI and the drive board is correct.
encoder pulses are
Err57 communication
not received.
fault
Subcode 105: The
communication
encoder pulses do
not change during
running.
Subcode 103:
The MCB does
not match the AC
drive.
Subcode 101: The
up and down slow-
down switches 1
are disconnected ◆◆ Check whether the signal feature (NO/
simultaneously. NC) of the slow-down switches and limit
Shaft position
Subcode 102: switches are consistent with the settings
Err58 switches 4B
The up limit of MCB parameters.
abnormal
switch feedback ◆◆ Check whether the slow-down and limit
and down limit switches malfunction.
switch feedback
are disconnected
simultaneously.
Err59 Special fault Others ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance. -
- 225 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
◆◆ Check the setting of F5-36 (Load cell
input selection).
Subcode 101: The
Analog ◆◆ Check whether the analog input cable of
Err62 analog load cell is 3B
disconnection the CTB or MCB is connected incorrectly
disconnected.
or disconnected.
◆◆ Adjust the load cell switch function.
Subcode 101: The ◆◆ Check the signal feature (NO/NC) setting
external fault signal of the external fault terminal.
Err64 External fault 5A
remains active for ◆◆ Check the input signal state of the
2s. external fault terminal.
Subcode 101: When
the door lock is
disconnected in
the leveling zone, ◆◆ Check the elevator moves to non-door
Err65 UCMP fault 5A
traction sheave zone, or contact the agent or Inovance.
pulse change is
detected after door
zone signal loss.
Subcode 101:
During braking
force detection,
◆◆ Check whether the brake works
Braking force the traction sheave
Err66 normally, or contact the agent or 5A
fault rotates and the
Inovance.
encoder PPR
exceeds the set
pulses.
- 226 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode
2: The self-
authentication
of the AC drive
failed.
Subcode 3: The
authentication of
the AC drive and
Permission
the MCB failed.
Err79 authentication ◆◆ Contact Inovance. 5A
Subcode 102: The
fault
authentication of
the system and
the DSP board
failed.
Subcode 105/106:
The system self-
authentication
failed.
Subcode 103: The
manufacturer
No. of the
communication
encoder and MCB
are inconsistent. ◆◆ Contact the agent or Inovance. 5A
Subcode 104: The
contract No. of the
communication
Err89 Special fault
encoder and MCB
are inconsistent.
Subcode 105:
Parameter
reading/ ◆◆ Check whether the cable connection
writing of the between the communication encoder 5A
communication and the drive board is correct.
encoder times
out.
- 227 -
7 Troubleshooting
Fault
Code
Subcode 103: The
authentication of
the system and
the CTB failed.
Subcode 104: The
authentication of
the system and
the car display
board failed.
Subcode 107:
The CTB self-
authentication
failed.
Permission
Subcode 2xx: The
Err94 authentication ◆◆ Contact Inovance. 1A
authentication of
prompt
the system and
HCBs of the front
door failed.
Subcode 3xx: The
authentication of
the system and
HCBs of the rear
door failed.
Subcode 4xx: The
authentication of
the system and
the car call board
failed.
◆◆ Err41 is not recorded at stop.
◆◆ Err42 is automatically reset when the door lock circuit is on or 1s after a

fault occurs in the door zone.
NOTE
◆◆ If Err51, Err52, and Err57 persist, they are recorded once every other hour.
- 228 -
8 Maintenance
8 Maintenance
8.1 Daily Inspection

As an important part of the elevator system, the control cabinet must be maintained
following national laws and regulations and industrial requirements.
CAUTION
◆◆ Never perform wiring at power-on. Failure to comply will result in an

electric shock.
◆◆ Before inspection, cut off all equipment power supplies. After

disconnecting the input power supply of the control cabinet, do not
perform further operations until the power indicator is off because
residual voltage still exists in the DC capacitor. Wait for the specified
interval before the next power-on.
◆◆ Never modify the wiring, disconnect cables, or remove optional cards

when the control cabinet is operating. Failure to comply will result in
an electric shock.
◆◆ The grounding terminal of the motor must be grounded. Otherwise,

you will suffer an electric shock when touching the motor housing.
◆◆ Maintenance and repair can be performed only by professional

electrical personnel.
WARNING
◆◆ Never operate the control cabinet with the protective cover removed.
◆◆ For illustration purpose, the drawings in this user guide are

sometimes shown without covers or protective guards. Remember to
install the covers or protective guards as specified before using this
product, and perform operations following the instructions.
◆◆ Tighten the screw terminals based on the specified tightening torque

to prevent the cable connections from overheating after becoming
loose. Failure to comply will result in a fire.
◆◆ Make sure that the input voltage of the main circuit is within the
allowable range. Incorrect voltage will affect the normal operation of
the control cabinet.
- 229 -
8 Maintenance
8.1.1 Inspection Items
No. Item
□ 1 Whether abnormal noise exists when the motor is running.
□ 2 Whether the motor vibrates excessively during running.
□ 3 Whether the installation environment of the control cabinet changes.
□ 4 Whether the control cabinet overheats.
Whether the electrical components inside the control cabinet work

□ 5
properly.
□ 6 Whether there is condensation on the control cabinet.
□ 7 Whether the screws inside the control cabinet become loose.
Whether abnormal noise exists in the contactors inside the control

□ 8
cabinet when the elevator is running.
8.1.2 Cleaning Items
No. Item
□ 1 Clean the control cabinet periodically.
The IP rating of the control cabinet is IP20. Protect the control cabinet
□ 2
from water and dust while cleaning.
Remove the dust on the surface of the control cabinet to prevent it from
□ 3
entering the control cabinet.
8.2 Periodic Maintenance

Perform periodic maintenance on the items that are difficult to check during daily
maintenance and running.
8.2.1 Inspection Items
No. Item
□ 1 Whether the screws become loose.
□ 2 Whether the wiring terminals have arc signs.
□ 3 Whether the electrical components work properly.
□ 4 Whether any internal cable is exposed.
- 230 -
8 Maintenance
8.2.2 Replacement of Quick-Wear Parts
The quick-wear parts in the control cabinet mainly include the fuse, air switch, and
fan. At the rated load, the contactors and air switch can be operated one million and
ten thousand times respectively, and the fan can work for 70,000 hours at an ambient
temperature of 40ºC. You can regularly replace these parts according to their service life
and actual operating conditions.
To facilitate field maintenance, the MR control cabinet is equipped with a removable

enclosure frame.
To remove the enclosure frame:

1. Remove the front cover.
2. Remove the two M5x12 screws
at the bottom of control cabinet.
3. Push up the enclosure frame.
Figure 8-1 Removal of the enclosure frame of the MR control cabinet
1 Fuse
The control cabinet is equipped with additional fuses (250 V, 5x20 mm, F5A/F1A) to
prevent fuse damage in case of emergency.
From left to right:

250V/5A - Control circuit fuse
250V/1A - Safety circuit fuse
250V/5A - Lighting fuse
Figure 8-2 Location of the fuses
- 231 -
8 Maintenance
2 MCB battery
The standard service life of 3 V lithium-manganese dioxide button cell (CR2032) on the
MCB is 2 to 3 years. The following figure shows the location of the cell.
3 V lithium-manganese
dioxide button cell
Figure 8-3 Location of the button cell on the MCB
3 PG card
Replace the PG card according to the following steps:
① Remove the front cover, disconnect the encoder cable, and unfasten the four M3x8
SEMS screws used to fix the PG card.
② Replace the PG card with a new one, retighten the SEMS screws, and reconnect the
cable.
M3x8 SEMS screws
PG card
Figure 8-4 Replacement of the PG card
- 232 -
8 Maintenance
◆◆ The part removal requires technical guidance from the manufacturer.
NOTE Do not remove the parts by yourself.
- 233 -
9 Options and Customization
9.1 List of Options

■ Input voltage class and overspeed governor voltage
Three-phase 380 V input power voltage (default, modification not supported)
220 VAC overspeed governor voltage (default, modification not supported)
■ Brake operating voltage
No. Item
□ 1 Continuous high-voltage (110 VDC) startup
□ 2 110 VDC for startup, 90 VDC for operating (default)
□ 3 110 VDC for startup, 80 VDC for operating
■ PG card
No. Item
□ 1 PG-D
□ 2 PG-E (Sin/Cos encoder)
□ 3 PG-A2 (incremental encoder)
□ 4 PG-F1
□ 5 Not required
■ Braking resistor
No. Item
□ 1 Required
□ 2 Not required
■ Additional functions
No. Item
□ 1 LED operating panel and connecting cable
□ 2 Connecting cables
□ 3 4G IoT
□ 4 10-channel I/O expansion board
- 234 -
■ Nameplate
No. Item
□ 1 Standard Inovance aluminum nameplate (default)
Other special nameplates (Contact the sales personnel of

□ 2
Inovance if customization is required.)
■ Logos and labels

Logo on the front cover
No. Item
□ 1 Standard Monarch white text on blue background (default)
Other special logos (Contact the sales personnel of Inovance

□ 2 if customization is required. The size cannot be changed
significantly.)
Logo and model labels on the MCB
No. Item
□ 1 Monarch logo and model labels (default)
Other special logo and model labels (Contact the sales personnel
□ 2 of Inovance if customization is required. The size cannot be
changed.)
Labels of functional safety certification and type test certification
No. Item
□ 1 Standard PCB and machine models (default)
Other models and certifications (Contact the sales personnel of

□ 2 Inovance if customization is required. The size cannot be changed
significantly.)
■ Customized MCB software
No. Item
□ 1 Dedicated customer code modification
Function software customization (Contact the sales personnel of

□ 2
- 235 -
■ Paper documents
No. Item
□ 1 Standard electrical schematic diagrams
Other special paper documents (Contact the sales personnel of

□ 2
■ Packaging material
No. Item
□ 1 MR control cabinet: standard carton
□ 2 MRL control cabinet: standard honeycomb carton
MRL control cabinet: wooden box (Contact the sales personnel of

□ 3
MRL control cabinet: other special packaging materials (Contact

□ 4
the sales personnel of Inovance if customization is required.)
9.2 Function Introduction of Options

Contact the sales personnel of Inovance as required. The following options are delivered
with the control cabinet.
Table 9-1 List of options
Applicable
Option Model Power Function
Class
Insert the micro SIM card of a local 4G mobile

phone to send the elevator data to the remote
WL415-DB All host through the 4G network. However, the
elevator can be monitored only and cannot be
4G IoT controlled.
module Send the elevator data to the remote host using
a LAN cable, through WIFI, or by inserting the
IOT-WL435D All micro SIM card of a local 4G mobile phone.
However, the elevator can be monitored only
and cannot be controlled.
- 236 -
Applicable
Option Model Power Function
Class
The MCTC-KZ-G1 has one RS458 interface, one

10-channel
CAN bus communication port, 10 DI terminals,
I/O
MCTC-KZ-G1 All and 10 DO terminals. It is connected to CAN1
expansion
bus of the MCB through the CAN port for the
board
expansion of I/O terminals.
For an MR control cabinet, a customized box is

Customized added only when the MCTC-KZ-G1, 4-channel
- All
box I/O expansion board, and protocol conversion
board are equipped.
9.2.1 4G IoT Module (WL415-DB/IoT-WL435D)
The 4G intelligent hardware reads the operation state information of the elevator
controller and sends it through the network to Inovance server or the designated server
for analysis and storage. You can view the running state of the elevator by visiting the
web platform or through the mobile phone APP.
Model Description 2G 3G 4G WIFI RJ45 RS232 RS485 SIM
Standard 4G data
WL415-DB gateway ✓ ✓ ✓ - - - ✓ ✓
(without SIM card)
Standard 4G
audio/video
IOT-WL435D ✓ ✓ ✓ ✓ WAN+LAN ✓ ✓ ✓
gateway
(without SIM card)
- 237 -
1 Outlines and dimensions
94.2
37.0 82.5
90.0
Figure 9-1 Outline and dimensions of WL415-DB (unit: mm)
91.2
37.0 82.5
90.0
Figure 9-2 Outline and dimensions of IOT-WL435D (unit: mm)
- 238 -
2 Port description
Table 9-2 WL415-DB port assignment
Port Pin Function Description
GND RS485 reference ground
485- Standard RS485 serial port
485+ Standard RS485 serial port
6P socket PE Grounding
0V DC power port voltage: 12–24 V

"12V/24V" is the positive electrode of the power supply, and
12V/24V "0V" is the negative electrode of the power supply.

WL415-DB supply current: ≥ 600 mA
4G antenna Internal thread antenna with female pin
USB Used for upgrade/commissioning by the manufacturer only.
Micro card: 12 mm x 15 mm
Changing the SIM card yourself is not recommended.
Contact the technicians of Inovance if required.
SIM card slot
Hot swapping is prohibited. If you need to change the card,
disconnect the power supply and wait for one minute before
operation. Failure to comply may cause damage.
Cloud service status indicator (green)
Local serial port communication indicator (green)
LED indicators
Fault alarm indicator (red)
4G signal intensity indicator (green)
- 239 -
Table 9-3 IOT-WL435D port assignment
Port Pin Function Description
24V DC power port voltage: 12–24 V

"24V" is the positive electrode of the power supply, and "0V"
7P socket is the negative electrode of the power supply.
0V Max. input current: 0.8 A
Other pins are not connected.
4G antenna Magnetic base antenna with internal thread and male pin
Reset key Resets the intelligent hardware.
Wide
area Used to connect external networks, supporting 10 M and 100
network M networks
(WAN)
Ethernet
Local
area Used to connect local devices, supporting 10 M and 100 M
network networks
(LAN)
Cloud service status indicator (green)
Local serial port communication indicator (green)
LED indicators
Fault alarm indicator (red)
4G signal intensity indicator (green)
- 240 -
Table 9-4 States and function descriptions of LED indicators
LED Function Description
Status indicator for communication with the server.

Steady off: no available network (4G intelligent hardware abnormal or
no available Ethernet connection)
Cloud service Slow flashing (once per second): Logging in to the server.
status indicator Steady on: maintaining a legal connection with the server (logged in to
the server successfully).
Quick flashing (10 times per second): connected to the server
and exchanging the data (remote upgrading and file uploading/
downloading)
This indicator is steady on when intelligent hardware is starting.
Green indicator for communication with the target device

Local serial port
Steady off: no data reading/writing, or communication times out
communication
Steady on: There is a data reading/writing operation. (Data flows
indicator
through in real time.)
Slow flashing (once per second): password required for communication
Red indicator that alarms faults

Fault alarm
Steady on: The system is faulty. (View fault details using the software
indicator
system or mobile phone APP.)
Off: Intelligent hardware works properly.
This indicator is off when intelligent hardware is starting.
All off: no available signal, unable to connect to the network, or

extremely poor network
One bar on: poor signal, poor network connection, and frequent offline
Signal intensity
of intelligent hardware
indicator
Two bars on: average signal, good network connection, and occasional
offline
Three bars on: excellent signal, stable network connection, and good
communication with the server
- 241 -
9.2.2 10-Channel I/O Expansion Board (MCTC-KZ-G1)
The MCTC-KZ-G1 has one RS458 interface, one CAN bus communication port, 10 DI
terminals, and 10 DO terminals.
It is connected to CAN1 bus of the MCB through the CAN port for the expansion of I/O
terminals. The CAN1 bus supports up to two expansion boards, with one in the machine
room and the other on the car top.
You can set the expansion board addresses using the DIP switches on the MCTC-KZ-G1.
When all switches are OFF, the expansion board is on the top of the car. When K1 is set
to ON (1) and others are set to OFF, the expansion board is in the machine room.
Set the functions of expansion board terminals in FD-11 to FD-50.
1 Outline and dimensions
J11 J5 J12 J1
COM X10 ... X1 COM MOD+ COM CAN + YM2 Y10 ... YM1 Y6 ... Y1
MOD- M24 CAN - M24
X9 X7 X5 X3 X1
X10 X8 X6 X4 X2 Y10 Y9 Y8 Y7 Y6 Y5 Y4 Y3 Y2 Y1
74
88
MCTC-KZ-G1
J6 J7 J10 K6
ON OFF K5 S3
2
ON
OFF ON K4
1
K3 S2
2
485CAN K2
ON
1
K1 S1
2
ON
J3
1
Φ 3 *4 ON OFF
J9
162
178
Figure 9-3 Outline and dimensions of MCTC-KZ-G1 (unit: mm)
- 242 -
2 Port description
Table 9-5 Description of MCTC-KZ-G1 terminals
Terminal Symbol Terminal Name Function Description
X1 Digital signal input 1

Digital signal inputs
J11 X6 Digital signal input 6 Rated voltage: 30 V
Rated current: 5 mA
M24V External 24 V power input
Y1 Relay output Y1
Y2 Relay output Y2
Y3 Relay output Y3
Y4 Relay output Y4
Y5 Relay output Y5
Y6 Relay output Y6
Relay output terminals
J1 Reference ground of relay Contact current capacity:
YM1
outputs Y1 to Y6 250 VAC, 5 A
Y7 Relay output Y7
Y8 Relay output Y8
Y9 Relay output Y9
Y10 Relay output Y10
Reference ground of relay

YM2
outputs Y7 to Y10
- 243 -
Connected to the external

+24V/COM External 24 VDC power supply
24 V power supply
J12
Reserved CAN Connected to the MCB for
CAN+/CAN-
communication port CAN communication
Connected to the external

+24V/COM 24 VDC output
24 V power supply
Reserved when the

expansion board is placed
on the top of the car.
J5 When installing the

Port for RS485 expansion board in the
MOD+/MOD-
communication with the MCB machine room, expand one
hall call for the rear door
to implement the through-
type door control of 40
floors.
When using Modbus

communication, short the
Modbus termination resistor
J6/J7 two pins on the ON end of
jumper
J6/J7 and connect them to
the termination resistor.
When using CAN

communication, short the
CAN termination resistor
J10 two pins on the ON end of
jumper
J10 and connect them to
the termination resistor.
J3 Reserved Factory reserved
- 244 -
Used to set the expansion

board address.
When all switches are OFF,
the expansion board is on
S1/S2/S3 Address DIP switch the top of the car.
When K1 is set to ON and
others are set to OFF, the
expansion board is in the
machine room.
Lights up (green) when the

X1 to X10 DI indicator corresponding external
input signal is active.
Lights up (green) when

Y1 to Y10 Relay output indicator the corresponding system
output is active.
Used by the manufacturer

only. Do not short it
J9 Reserved randomly. Otherwise, the
control cabinet may not
work properly.
- 245 -
9.2.3 Customized Box
Install the customized box on the right side of the MR control cabinet.
Installation steps:
① Remove the knockout on the control cabinet using a diagonal plier.
② Use two M4x10 SEMS screws to fix the customized box on the right side of the control
cabinet.
◆◆ Before wiring, remember to remove the upper cover of the customized
NOTE box.
M4x10 SEMS screws
①
Knockout Customized box
Figure 9-4 Installation of the customized box
- 246 -
10 Functions and Solutions
10.1 Attendant Function
1 Function description
■ The elevator responds to hall calls.
■ The elevator doors do not close automatically. You need to hold down the door close
button to close the doors. If you release the door close button during door close, the
elevator doors open again automatically.
■ In the attendant state, direct travel ride and direction change can be implemented
by using terminals JP20 and JP22 on the car call board (CCB) respectively. When the
direct travel ride signal is active, the elevator does not respond to hall calls. After the
direction change signal becomes active once, the elevator responds to calls in the
reverse direction.
■ If the elevator that enters the attendant state is under parallel/group control, the hall
calls of this elevator are responded to by other elevators in the parallel/group control
system.
◆◆ The system offers the attendant function by default. Certain actions can
be modified by setting the parameters.
NOTE
2 Wiring
6.0 81.0 Ø4.5 2.0

6.0
1.5±0.5
JP1 J1
JP9
JP2 JP10
MCTC-COB-A1
JP3 JP11
108.8
JP4 JP12
JP5 JP13
Floor button indicator
JP6 JP14
7.0
Floor
229.0
JP7 JP15
PE
button
JP8 ON JP16
6.8
1 2
JP17 JP21
S5
JP18 JP22
1234
JP19 JP23
JP20 JP24
Y2
COM
+24V
Y1
LIGHT
J27 J28 CO 2 MOD -
FAN
CO 1
MOD +
Z01
COM
COM
M24V
TOP 1
M24V
J26 COM
MOD +
J25 MOD -
MOD -
J2 MOD +
BOOT
J8
COM M24V
8.1
39.5 11.4
98.0
Figure 10-1 Wiring in the attendant mode
- 247 -
After pins 2 and 3 of JP21 on the CCB become ON, the elevator enters the attendant
state.
After pins 2 and 3 of JP20 on the CCB become ON, the elevator enters the direct travel
ride state.
After pins 2 and 3 of JP22 on the CCB operate, the elevator in the attendant state
changes its running direction once.
Parameter
Parameter Name Setting Range Default
No.
Attendant/Automatic
F5-00 3–200 3
state switchover time
Program control Bit10: Elevator lock in the attendant

F6-41 0
selection 2 state
Bit0: Calls canceled after entering the

attendant state
Bit1: No response to hall calls
Bit2: Attendant/Automatic state
switchover
Attendant function Bit3: Door close at jog
F6-43 128
selection Bit4: Automatic door close
Bit5: Buzzer tweeting at intervals in the
attendant state
Bit6: Continuous buzzer tweeting in
the attendant state
Bit7: Car call button flashing to prompt
Attendant/Automatic state switchover:
In the attendant state, if there is a hall call at non-current floors, the elevator
automatically switches to the automatic (normal) state after the time set in F5-00
is reached. After this running is complete, the elevator automatically returns to the
attendant state (Bit2 of F6-43 must be set to 1). When F5-00 is smaller than 5, the
attendant/automatic state switchover is disabled.
- 248 -
10.2 Fire Emergency Function

the parameters)
Returning to fire emergency floor:
■ The elevator automatically clears car calls and hall calls.
■ The elevator stops at the nearest floor with doors closed and directly runs to the fire
emergency floor.
■ The elevator keeps the doors open after arriving at the fire emergency floor.
■ If the elevator is under parallel/group control, it automatically exits the parallel/

group control system after entering the fire emergency state.
Firefighter operation:
■ The elevator responds only to car halls, and only one call can be registered.
■ Automatic door open/close is disabled. You need to press (jog) the door open/close
button to open/close the doors.
■ The light curtain signal input is inactive, but the safety edge signal input is active.
◆◆ The system offers the fire emergency function by default. Certain actions
can be modified by setting the parameters.
NOTE
- 249 -
2 Wiring
① Returning to fire emergency floor
Scheme: Input the fire emergency signal through the HCB.
Table 10-1 Fire emergency signal input through the HCB
Terminal Function
HCB Wiring
Name Description
MCTC-HCB-R600S
Interface for the

fire emergency
and elevator lock
switches Elevator Fire
CN4 Pins 1 and 2 are for lock emergency
input input
elevator lock input,
and pins 3 and 4 are 1234
for fire emergency
input.
MCTC-HCB-D630S
Interface for the
fire emergency
and elevator lock
switches
Elevator Fire
Pins 1 and 2 are for lock emergency
CN4
elevator lock input, input input
and pins 3 and 4 are
1234
for fire emergency
input.
- 250 -
② Firefighter operation
Scheme: Enter the firefighter operation state through the CCB.
6.0 81.0 Ø4.5 2.0

6.0
1.5±0.5
JP1 J1
JP9
JP2 JP10
MCTC-COB-A1
JP3 JP11
108.8
JP4 JP12
JP5 JP13
JP6 JP14
7.0
229.0
JP21
JP7 JP15
PE
JP8 ON JP16
6.8
1 2
Firefighter switch
JP17 JP21
S5
JP18 JP22
JP19 JP23
JP20 JP24
Y2
COM
+24V
Y1
LIGHT
J27 J28 CO 2 MOD -
FAN
CO 1
MOD +
Z01
COM
COM
M24V
TOP 1
M24V
J26 COM
MOD +
J25 MOD -
MOD -
J2 MOD +
BOOT
J8
COM M24V
8.1
39.5 11.4
98.0
Figure 10-2 Wiring of firefighter operation signal input through the CCB
Parameter
No.
Bit3: Arrival gong output in the inspection

or fire emergency state
Bit4: Multiple car calls registered in the
fire emergency state
Bit5: Retentive at power failure in the fire
emergency state
Bit6: Door close by holding down the
door close button
Bit7: Reserved
Bit8: Door close at car call registration
Fire emergency Bit9: Hall call floors displayed in the fire
F6-44 16456
function selection emergency state
Bit10: Forced running in the firefighter
state
Bit11: Exiting the firefighter state upon
arrival at fire emergency floor
Bit12: Not clearing car calls at reverse
door open in the firefighter state
Bit14: Door open by holding down the
door open button
Bit15: Automatic door open at fire
emergency floor
- 251 -
Parameter
No.
40/72: Fire emergency floor switchover

F5-c Xc function selection 0
signal NO/NC
4: Fire emergency floor arrival signal

F5-29 Y4 function selection 0
feedback
F6-03 Fire emergency floor 0 to F6-00 0
F8-12 Fire emergency floor 2 0 to F6-00 0
Input setting:
You can input the fire emergency signal through the fire emergency switch on the HCB
at any floor and the firefighter signal through JP24 on the CCB. If you input these signals
through the MCB, set the parameters according to the preceding table (input through Xa
and Xb).
The control cabinet supports the switchover of fire emergency floor. The switchover
signal must be input through terminal X on the MCB (such as Xc).
Output setting:
The fire emergency floor arrival signal is output by relay Y on the MCB (such as Y4).
10.3 Elevator Lock Function

■ After executing all car calls registered, the elevator returns to the elevator lock floor.
■ After arriving at the elevator lock floor, the elevator opens and closes the doors and
stops.
■ After stopping, the elevator cancels all the hall call displays and turns off the lighting
and fan in the car.
◆◆ The system offers the elevator lock function by default. Certain actions
can be modified by setting the parameters.
NOTE
- 252 -
2 Wiring
Scheme: Input the elevator lock signal through the HCB.
Table 10-2 Elevator lock signal input through the HCB
Terminal Terminal Wiring

HCB Function
Name Description
MCTC-HCB-R600S
Interface for the

fire emergency
and elevator lock
switches Elevator Fire
CN4 Pins 1 and 2 are for lock emergency
input input
elevator lock input,
and pins 3 and 4 are 1234
for fire emergency
input.
MCTC-HCB-D630S
Interface for the
fire emergency
and elevator lock
switches
Elevator Fire
Pins 1 and 2 are for lock emergency
CN4
elevator lock input, input input
and pins 3 and 4 are
1234
for fire emergency
input.
Parameter
No.
F6-04 Elevator lock floor F6-01 to F6-00 1
Elevator lock start

F6-38 00.00–23.59 0
time
- 253 -
Parameter
No.
Elevator lock end

F6-39 00.00–23.59 0
time
Program control
F6-40 Bit5: Timed elevator lock 0
selection 1
Bit8: Elevator lock at door open

Program control
F6-41 Bit9: Display available at elevator lock 0
selection 2
Bit10: Elevator lock in the attendant state
Program control Bit5: Clearing calls immediately at

F6-42 0
selection 3 elevator lock
Input and setting:
In normal cases, the elevator lock signal is input through the elevator lock switch on the
HCB at any floor. If you input this signal through the MCB, set the parameters according
to the preceding table (such as Xd as the input terminal).
10.4 Overload/Full-Load Function

Overload:
■ The buzzer tweets.
■ The elevator doors cannot close, even if you press the door close button.
■ The car display board displays " 超载 ", "OL", or "OVERLOAD".
■ The HCB displays " 满载 " or "FL".
Full-load:
■ The HCB displays " 满载 " or "FL".
■ The car calls can be used to call the elevator as normal.
■ The hall calls can be registered, but the elevator does not respond to them.
The elevator overload and full-load switches are classified into two types: analog
and digital. The following part describes the parameter settings for the two types of
switches.
- 254 -
2 Wiring
Wiring and parameter setting of analog overload/full-load switch:
Parameter
Type Wiring
Setting
301 and 302 are connected to the positive and negative

power cables of the analog load cell respectively, and
Analog signal
Ai is connected to the signal cable.
connected to
WT2 F5-36 = 2
terminal WT2 on 24V
301 1
COM 302 2
the CTB Analog
/ 3 load cell
Analog input Ai 4
System 24 V is connected to the positive power cable

of the analog load cell, and pins M and Ai of terminal
CN9 on the MCB are connected to the signal cable
and negative power cable of the analog load cell
Analog signal
respectively.
connected to the F5-36 = 3
MCB 24V
Ai
CN9 M
MCTC-MCB
Analog load cell
When an analog load cell is used, load cell auto-tuning must be performed. Otherwise,
the load cell signal will be invalid.
Perform overload/full-load auto-tuning of the analog load cell following Figure 10-3.
- 255 -
Set F8-01 (Pre-torque selection) to 0.
Make sure that the car is unloaded.
Set F8-00 (Car load ratio during load cell auto-

tuning) to 0.
Press the ENTER key on the LED operating panel
to save the setting.
Put N% of the rated load in the car.
Set F8-00 (Car load ratio during load cell auto-

tuning) to N.
Press the ENTER key on the LED operating panel
to save the setting.
End
Figure 10-3 Overload/Full-load auto-tuning for analog load cell
F8-06 (No-load measured by load cell) and F8-07 (Full-load measured by load cell)
record the auto-tuned no-load and full-load values respectively. You can monitor the
current car load by viewing F8-05 (Current car load). When the current car load exceeds
100% of the rated load, the system reports an overload fault.
◆◆ F8-05 (Current car load), F8-06 (No-load measured by load cell), and F8-07
(Full-load measured by load cell) record the binary data indicating the car
load condition rather than the actual car load or the ratio of the actual car
NOTE
load to the rated load.
- 256 -
Wiring and parameter setting of digital full-load/overload switch:
Parameter
Type Wiring
Setting
Connect the full-load signal, overload signal, and

common terminal of switches to X7, X8, and 301
Digital signal
respectively.
connected to
WT1
F5-36 = 1
terminal WT1 on 24V
301 1
COM 302 2
the CTB Overload signal X8 3 LWO
LWX
Full-load signal X7 4
In this figure, pins X23 and X24 on the MCB are used
for overload and full-load signal inputs respectively.
Digital signal
24V
connected to the X23
Full-load
F5-36 = 0
CN9 X24
MCB
Overload
MCTC-MCB
Digital load cell
The parameters involved in full-load/overload auto-tuning of the analog load cell

include:
Parameter Parameter
Setting Range Description
No. Name
Car load ratio Sets the load ratio of the car

F8-00 during load cell 0–100 properly during analog load
auto-tuning cell auto-tuning.
1: Load cell pre-torque
compensation
2: Automatic pre-torque Set this parameter to 0
Pre-torque
F8-01 compensation before starting analog load
selection
3: Both load cell pre- cell auto-tuning.
torque compensation
and automatic pre-torque
compensation enabled
Current car Displays the current load

F8-05 0–1023
load condition in the car.
- 257 -
Parameter Parameter
Setting Range Description
No. Name
No-load
Records the auto-tuned no-
F8-06 measured by 0–1023
load data.
load cell
Full-load
Records the auto-tuned full-
F8-07 measured by 0–1023
load data.
load cell
Parameter settings for digital overload/full-load switch:
Parameter
Type Parameter Name Setting Range Setting Value
No.
0: MCB digital
Setting of Load cell input input
F5-36 0
input type selection 1: CTB digital
input
14/46: Overload
F5-e Xe function selection 0–195
signal NO/NC
MCB 15/47: Overload

F5-f Xf function selection 0–199
input signal NO/NC
38/60: Light-load
F5-g Xg function selection 0–199
signal NO/NC
Bit6 of F5-25 Full-load signal NO/NC 0–511 Bit6 = 1 (Default: NO)

CTB input
Bit7 of F5-25 Overload signal NO/NC 0–511 Bit7 = 0 (Default: NC)
Monitoring of overload/full-load signal:
You can view F5-35 (Terminal state display) to check whether the overload/full-load
signal of the system is active. Segment G indicates the full-load signal state, and DP
indicates the overload signal state.
5 4 3 2 1
DP
Figure 10-4 Monitoring of overload/full-load signal (F5-35)
- 258 -
10.5 Time-based Floor/Door Service

Time-based floor service: The elevator only responds to car/hall calls of specified
parking floors during certain periods.
Time-based door service: The elevator only responds to car/hall calls of specified door
operator service floors during certain periods.
■ To enable the time-based floor service, set Bit8 of FE-32 (Elevator function selection 1)
to 1 and Bit0 to 0.
■ To enable the time-based door service, set Bit8 of FE-32 (Elevator function selection 1)
to 0 and Bit0 to 1.
When the time-based floor service is enabled:
Parameter
No.
Start time of time-based

F6-18 00.00–23.59 00.00
floor service 1
End time of time-based floor

F6-19 00.00–23.59 00.00
service 1
Service floor 1 of time-based

F6-20 0–65535 65535
floor service 1
Service floor 2 of time-based

F6-21 0–65535 65535
floor service 1

F6-36 0–65535 65535
floor service 1
Start time of time-based

F6-22 00.00–23.59 00.00
floor service 2
End time of time-based floor

F6-23 00.00–23.59 00.00
service 2

F6-24 0–65535 65535
floor service 2

F6-25 0–65535 65535
floor service 2
- 259 -
Parameter
No.

F6-27 0–65535 65535
floor service 2
These parameters set the time range and service floors of time-based floor service 1 and
time-based floor service 2.
During non-time-based floor service periods, the elevator responds to the service floors
defined in F6-05 (Service floors).
■ Service floor 1 corresponds to floors 1 to 16.
■ Service floor 2 corresponds to floors 17 to 32.
■ Service floor 3 corresponds to floors 33 to 40.
For example, in the period of time-based floor service 1 (set by F6-18 and F6-19), the
elevator responds only to the service floors set by F6-20, F6-21, and F6-36.
The service floors of time-based floor service are set in the same way as those set by F6-
05.
When the time-based door service is enabled:
The service floors of time-based floor service 1 (set by F6-20, F6-21, and F6-36) are used
as front door service floors, and those of time-based floor service 2 (set by F6-24, F6-25,
and F6-37) are used as rear door service floors.
10.6 Running Tests

The running test parameters are set to facilitate elevator commissioning and
maintenance. The tests include:
■ Car/Hall call test
■ Random running test
■ Running test with certain functions (hall call, door open, overload, and limit function)
disabled
Before starting the normal-speed running test, ensure that the shaft is not obstructed,
and the safety circuits, door lock circuits and shaft switches are all normal.
- 260 -
Set the following running test parameters (group F7) using the MCB.
Parameter
No.
F7-00 Car call floor registered 0 to F6-00 0
F7-01 Up hall call floor registered 0 to F6-00 0
Down hall call floor

F7-02 0 to F6-00 0
registered
F7-03 Random running times 0–60000 0
0: Disabled
F7-04 Hall call forbidden 0
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
F7-05 Door open forbidden 0
1: Enabled
0: Disabled
F7-06 Overload function 0
1: Enabled
0: Enabled
F7-07 Limit function 0
1: Disabled
Example of parameter setting:
If F7-00, F7-01 and F7-02 are set to 6, 3 and 5 respectively, the car call registered is floor 6,
up call registered is floor 3, and down call registered is floor 5. After the test parameters
are set, these calls remain active until the parameters are changed to 0 or the system
power is completely off once.
If you start the running test by setting F-8, the keypad displays "E88" when the elevator
enters the test state.
■ F-1: Command input of the running floor
bottom floor of the elevator (F6-01). Use the UP key to set your destination floor in the
range from Bottom floor to Top floor and press the SET key to save the setting. Then,
the elevator runs to the destination floor, and the display automatically switches to the
F-0 menu.
■ F-8: Test function
- 261 -
The setting values of F-8 are as follows:
Limit switches Manual braking force

1 Hall call forbidden 4 8
disabled test
Balance coefficient
2 Door open forbidden 6 Slip experiment 9
detection
3 Overload forbidden 7 Manual UCMP test 10 Steel rope slip test
After the setting is complete, press the SET key. The LEDs display "E88" and flash,
indicating the elevator is under test. When you press the PRG key to exit, F-8 restores to
0 automatically.
UCMP test:
Test conditions:
● The Normal/Inspection knob is turned to the Inspection position, the elevator

stops in the door zone, and the door lock is closed.
Test method:
● Confirm that the Normal/Inspection knob is turned to the Inspection position
and the door lock is closed.
● Set F-8 (Test function) to 7 or F3-24 (Program function selection) to 2 to enable
the UCMP test function. Then, disconnect the door lock circuit.
● Press and hold the UP or DOWN button. The shorting door lock circuit relay
shorts the door lock, and the elevator starts inspection as normal.
● After the elevator moves to non-door zone, the UCMP module stops shorting
the door lock, and the elevator reports Err65 (UCMP fault) and stops running.
Other design descriptions:

● When the elevator is not in the inspection state or the door zone, or the door
lock is inactive, the setting of F-8 to 7 or F3-24 to 2 is invalid.
● After F-8 is set to 7 or F3-24 is set to 2, clearing is automatically performed after
one running and after power failure.
● In the UCMP test mode, the elevator performs a linear acceleration at an
acceleration rate of "F3-08+0.4 m/s2" (F3-08+0.4 m/s2 ≤ max. acceleration rate).
The maximum speed cannot exceed the smaller value of 0.6 and the rated
speed.
- 262 -
Braking force detection:
Use of the MCB:
A. Manual braking force detection
(1) Parameter setting
Parameter
Function Description Setting Range Default Remarks
No.
Braking force detection

enabled 8: Enable the braking
F-8 0 -
(Set F-8 to 8 using the force detection
keypad.)
Range: 0 to 2
0: Meaningless
F7-9 Braking force detection result 0 -
1: Pass
2: Fail
(2) Detection procedure

● In the inspection state, set F-8 to 8. The elevator shields all calls, inhibits door
open, and maintains a closed door lock. It will automatically perform door
close if the doors are not closed.
● After the door lock becomes active, the shorting motor stator contactor and
RUN contactor start their output.
● The DSP run command becomes active, and the DSP board outputs torque to
implement the braking force detection.
● After the detection is complete, the MCB stops the output of the shorting
motor stator contactor and RUN contactor.
● View the value of F7-9 to check the braking force detection result.
● The hall call and door functions restore to normal.
(3) If F7-9 is 2, the braking force fails to perform up to standard.

In this case, the elevator reports Err66 which is non-resettable.
To reset this fault, perform the braking force detection again. The fault is reset
only when F7-9 is 1.
- 263 -
B. Automatic braking force detection
Parameter
Parameter Name Setting Range Default Remarks
No.
F7-9 Braking force detection result 0–2 0 -
Countdown for braking force

F7-10 0–1440 1440 -
detection period
● Set the countdown for braking force detection period in F7-10. In the normal,
elevator lock, parking, and VIP states, one minute will be subtracted from the
timer when the time passing by is less than one minute. The timer is retentive
at power failure.
● When the time displayed on the timer (F7-10) is smaller than 720 minutes,
the elevator enters the braking force detection waiting state. At this time,
there is no car call or hall call. After the system stop time exceeds F9-01 (F9-
01 ≠ 0; wait three minutes if F9-01 is 0), a trigger request for the braking force
detection is sent.
● When the time displayed on the timer (F7-10) is smaller than 10 minutes, the
elevator clears all car calls after arriving at the destination floor and stopping,
with no response to hall calls. After the car buzzer tweets for 30s, a trigger
request for the braking force detection is sent.
● When there is a trigger request, the elevator starts the braking force detection
immediately if the door lock is on. If the door lock is not on, it outputs a door
close command. F7-9 is restored to 1440 after the detection is finished.
● During the detection, "E88" is displayed on the keypad. The display is
automatically restored to floor number after completion of the test.
Balance coefficient auto-tuning:
(1) Auto-tuning condition:
The system is in the normal or parking mode and there is no fault above level 3.
(2) Parameter setting:
Set F-8 (Test function) to 11 using the keypad or F3-24 (Program function selection)
to 6 using the LED operating panel. Ensure that the rated load (F0-05) is set correctly.
(3) Running procedure:
After parameters are set properly, hall calls are not allowed to register. The elevator
- 264 -
executes all car calls and judges whether the door close limit is reached. After the
door lock is applied and remains active for 3s, the elevator enters the test mode and
the HCB displays "θ". The elevator automatically runs whole travel.
(4) Display result:
F7-13 (Reference value of balance coefficient) and F7-14 (Reference value of brake
torque upper limit) are stored and the keypad displays "Pxx.xx Txxx" in scrolling
mode for 8s. The self-monitoring torque is set by F2-33 (range: 50%–150%).
Steel rope slip experiment:
Use the keypad to set F-8 (Test function) to 10 to enable the steel rope slip
experiment. The HCB displays "θ".
Step 1: The elevator automatically moves to the bottom floor and starts the slip
experiment.
Step 2: The elevator automatically moves to the top floor and then returns to the
bottom floor.
Step 3: The keypad automatically displays the amount of slip " ︻ XXX" or " ︼ XXX"
(unit: cm) for 10s and displays "E88" on completion of the experiment. You
can press the PRG key on the keypad to exit the experiment.
◆◆ During the slip experiment, the car and hall call signals are shielded.
◆◆ During the slip experiment, the elevator exits the experiment if it is not in
NOTE the normal state.
10.7 Anti-Nuisance Function

The system automatically judges the number of passengers in the car and registered car
calls. If too many car calls are registered, the system determines that a nuisance exists
and cancels all car calls. In this case, register the car calls correctly again.
Two judging methods are available:
① Nuisance judged by load cell: An analog load cell is required to use this function. The
system determines that a nuisance exists when the number of registered car calls
exceeds the number of passengers in the car plus 3. Every passenger is calculated by
70 kg.
- 265 -
② Nuisance judged by light curtain: The system determines that a nuisance exists when
it does not receive a light curtain signal more than three consecutive times after the
elevator stops at arrival.
Parameter
No.
F0-05 Rated load 300–9999 1000
0: Disabled
Anti-nuisance
F8-08 1: Nuisance judged by load cell 0
function
2: Nuisance judged by light curtain
Set the rated elevator load properly. It is used in the anti-nuisance function.
10.8 Accessibility Function

This function, which allows wheelchair passengers to use the elevator conveniently, is
implemented using the COP and landing operating panel (LOP) for the disabled.
■ If there is a call registered using the COP for the disabled, the door open holding time
is prolonged.
■ If there is a door open command from the COP for the disabled, the door open
holding time is prolonged.
■ If there is a call registered using the LOP for the disabled, the door open holding time
is prolonged.
- 266 -
2 Wiring
COP for the disabled
J1 MCTC-COB-A1
COB2

MCTC-CTB-H5
COB1 J1 MCTC-COB-A1
Main COP
Figure 10-5 Wiring 1 of the COP for the disabled
COB2 is used as the interface for connecting the COP for the disabled (Bit12 of F6-40 = 1)
J1 MCTC-COB-A1
COB2

MCTC-CTB-H5
COB1 J1 MCTC-COB-A1 J2
Main COP
Figure 10-6 Wiring 2 of the COP for the disabled
The second CCB cascaded is used as the interface for connecting the COP for the
disabled (Bit13/Bit14 of F6-40 = 1)
- 267 -
The accessibility function can be enabled by the MCTC-HCB-B.
BM
AM
C5
C6
A2
A1
C1
C2
C3
C4
B2
B1
Display board
JP1 MCTC-HCB-B JP2
JP3 JP4
JP5 JP6 1234 1234

JP5 JP6
Up call Down call
CN1 from the from the
disabled disabled
Figure 10-7 Wiring for the accessibility function enabled by the MCTC-HCB-B
Parameter
No.
Bit0: Accessibility function selection

Bit12: Car call auxiliary command
terminal used for accessibility function
Program control Bit13: Duplicated command used as
F6-40 0
selection 1 accessibility and rear door functions
(0: rear door function; 1: accessibility
function)
Bit14: Car call command duplication
Special door open

FB-19 10–1000 30
holding time
The following table describes the bits of F6-40.
Bit Function Description
Accessibility function Used to enable or disable the accessibility

Bit0
selection function.
Car call auxiliary Used to set the CTB auxiliary command terminal
Bit12 command terminal used (CN8) as input of calls from the disabled
for accessibility function (command duplication is not required).
- 268 -
Bit Function Description
Used to set the use of duplicated command

Duplicated command (effective only when the function set by Bit14 is
Bit13 used as accessibility and enabled).
rear door functions 0: Rear door function
1: Accessibility function
Car call command duplication:

If this parameter is ineffective, CN7 is used for
front door calls or ordinary calls, and CN8 is used
Car call command for rear door calls or calls from the disabled.
Bit14
duplication If this parameter is effective, inputs 1 to 16 of CN7
and CN8 are used for front door calls or ordinary
calls, and inputs 17 to 32 are used for rear door
calls or calls from the disabled.
FB-15 (Special door open holding time) is used to set the door open holding time when
there is a call from the disabled.
10.9 VIP Running Function

The Tomorrow cabinet provides the VIP function. If this function is enabled, the elevator
runs to the VIP floor first to provide services for VIP people.
■ The elevator responds only to car calls. Registered hall calls are cleared
automatically.
■ The elevator does not close the doors automatically. You need to hold down the
door close button to close the doors. If you release the door close button during
door close, the elevator doors will open again automatically.
■ Set the VIP running mode in Bit8 of F6-46 (VIP function selection).
When Bit8 is set to 1, the elevator responds only to one car call (the last one
registered). After arriving at the destination floor, the elevator automatically exits the
VIP state.
When Bit8 is set to 0, there is no limit on the number of car calls. The elevator
automatically exits the VIP state in either of the following conditions:
1) It has executed all car calls. (The elevator automatically enters the car call running
30s after each stop if the door open/close button is not pressed.)
2) No car call is registered within 30s after the elevator has entered the VIP state.
- 269 -
2 Wiring
Input from CN2/CN3 on the HCB
VIP input
1234
Set FD-07 or FD-08 to 4 to enable the VIP service.
CN1 CN2 CN3 CN4
Figure 10-8 Wiring for the VIP mode enabled by the HCB
Parameter
No.
F6-12 VIP floor 0 to F6-00 8
Elevator function
FE-32 Bit9: VIP function Bit9 = 1
selection 1
Bit0: VIP enabled by hall call at VIP floor

VIP function
F6-46 Bit1: VIP enabled by terminal 0
selection
Bit8: Number of VIP car calls limited
- 270 -
Example: The following part introduces how to use the VIP function and set the VIP
floor.
① Parameter setting (For example, set floor 8 of a 20-floor elevator as the VIP floor.)

Setting Range Remarks
No. Name Value
Top floor of the Sets the top floor and

F6-00 F6-01 to 40 20
elevator bottom floor of the
elevator, determined by
Bottom floor of
F6-01 1 to F6-00 1 the number of leveling
the elevator
plates installed.
Set floor 8 as the VIP

F6-12 VIP floor 0 to F6-00 8
floor.
Elevator
FE-32 function Bit9: VIP function Bit9 = 1 Enables the VIP function.
selection 1
Bit8 = 1: The elevator

responds only to one
car call (the last one
VIP function Bit8: Number of VIP registered) in the VIP
F6-46 -
selection car calls limited state.
Bit8 = 0: The number of
car calls is not limited in
the VIP state.
② Method of entering the VIP state
VIP enabled by hall call at VIP floor: The elevator enters the VIP state only when there is
a hall call (input by the up/down hall call button) at the VIP floor. The parameter to be
set is as follows.

No. Name Value
The elevator enters the

VIP function Bit0: VIP enabled by VIP state when there is an
F6-46 Bit0 = 1
selection hall call at VIP floor active hall call at the VIP
floor.
VIP enabled by terminal: Make the elevator enter the VIP state through the terminal for
VIP hall call at any floor. In this mode, after the VIP becomes active, the elevator directly
- 271 -
runs to the VIP floor, automatically opens the doors, and wait for passengers. The
parameters to be set are as follows.

No. Name Value
FD-07 HCB: JP1 input NO inputs (value: 0): FD-07 = 4

1: Elevator lock
The two parameters are
signal
used to set the functions
2: Fire emergency
of JP1 and JP2 on the
signal
HCB.
3: Current floor
FD-08 HCB: JP2 input FD-08 = 4 The settings are
forbidden signal
effective for all HCBs.
4: VIP signal
You can use either JP1
5: Security signal
or JP2 for VIP input.
6: Door close button
input
After any terminal for

VIP function Bit1: VIP enabled by VIP hall call becomes
F6-46 Bit1 = 1
selection terminal active, the elevator
enters the VIP state.
10.10 Braking Force Detection Function

the parameters)
To prevent failure of the motor brake that guarantees safe running, check whether the
braking force meets the requirements periodically. The control system will monitor the
braking force regularly.
2 Wiring
No wiring is required.
Parameter Function
No. Description
Torque output When it is set to 0, the torque

F2-32 1s to 10s 5
duration output lasts for 5s by default.
- 272 -
Parameter Function
No. Description
1% to 150% of When it is set to 0, 80% of the

Torque
F2-33 the rated motor 110 rated motor torque is used by
amplitude
torque default.
Threshold
of pulses When it is set to 0, 30 encoder
1 to 100 encoder
F2-34 for judging 0 feedback pulses are used by
feedback pulses
braking force default.
abnormal
When it is set to 0, the system

1° to 20°
Threshold of uses 5° for synchronous
(mechanical
F2-35 excessive slip 0 motors and 10° for
motor rotation
distance asynchronous motors by
angle)
default.
8: Manual
Use the keypad to start the
F-8 Test function braking force 0
braking force test.
test
Braking force
F7-09 detection 0–2 0 /
result
Countdown
The countdown time is
for braking
F7-10 0–1440 1440 automatically restored to 1440
force detection
after the test finishes.
period
Manual test:
① The system is in the inspection state and the inspection switch is active.
② With the door lock closed, the elevator stops in the door zone.
③ Set F-8 (Test function) to 8 using the keypad.
④ When the elevator enters the braking force test state, the MCB displays "E88".
⑤ The shorting motor stator and RUN contactors have an output, but the brake
contactor has no output.
⑥ The system outputs a torque according to the parameters related to the braking
force and then starts the braking force test.
- 273 -
⑦ "E88" disappears on the MCB when the test is complete. The test result is determined
by the value of F7-09 (Braking force detection result). If F7-09 is 2, the elevator
reports Err66 (braking force failed to perform up to standard) and stops running. This
fault cannot be reset.
Automatic test:
When ※Detection conditions are met, the system automatically enters the test state.
The operations are the same as steps ④ , ⑤ , ⑥ , and ⑦ of the manual test.
Err66 cannot be reset through power-off and can be automatically reset only when the
braking force test is redone and passes.
◆◆ Countdown function: After 12 hours pass, the system starts to judge

whether the following condition 1 is met. If the braking force test has been
performed, the countdown parameter (F7-10) restores to 24 hours. If not,
the system proceeds to condition 2 (forced test).
◆◆ During the automatic braking force test, no fault is reported for hall
calls. The keypad displays "E88" to indicate the test state. Hall calls can
be registered, but the elevator does not respond to them. After the test
is complete, the system returns to the normal state and responds to
registered hall calls, but the car calls are canceled. The elevator doors
cannot be opened or closed.
※
Detection conditions:
NOTE ◆◆ Condition 1: Normal braking force test

Under the condition of no car and hall calls, the braking force test is
performed after the elevator energy saving time is reached or three
minutes.
◆◆ Condition 2: Forced braking force test

The system makes a judgment ahead of 10 minutes. When the time set
in F7-10 (Countdown for braking force detection period) is 10 minutes or
below, the buzzer tweets for 30s. You can disable the buzzer by setting
Bit13 of F8-19. In this case, the registered hall calls are reserved, but the
car calls are canceled. The elevator doors can be opened or closed. The
system starts the braking force test after door close.
- 274 -
10.11 Automatic Emergency Evacuation at Power Failure
1 Background
Passengers may be trapped in the car if the power fails during the use of an elevator.
Therefore, an emergency evacuation device that can automatically release passengers
at power failure is required.
2 Solution: elevator emergency evacuation device
The elevator emergency evacuation device provides power for the motor and drive
control circuit.
Because each emergency evacuation device has its control system, the devices of
different brands may be different in terms of control and output wiring. Perform wiring
by following the user guide of the emergency evacuation device. Taking Monarch
automatic rescue device (ARD) as an example, this section describes the use of the
emergency evacuation device.
Emergency
Evacuation Principle
Evacuation Mode
After the failure of mains electricity, the standby power supply is

Emergency evacuation activated to power up the control system. The controller drives
by controller drive the motor to move the car to the leveling zone where passengers
can go out.
After the failure of mains electricity, the standby power supply is

Emergency evacuation
activated to power up the control system. The controller shorts
by shorting stator
the motor stator and releases the brake to let the car move to the
braking
leveling zone where passengers can go out.
- 275 -
3 Wiring
The following figure shows the wiring of the ARD.
Elevator control cabinet

MCTC-ARD-C
Main air switch for
QF power supply Input power cable K1
Output power cable
L1 L1 R R
1 2 2 1
R
L2 L2 S S
S
User
3 4 4 3
L3 L3 T T
T
power
5 6 5 6
N N1 N N
N
supply
7 8 63 64
PE PE PE PE
PE
DI3
13 14 Main air switch
monitoring signal
COM
Power distribution box Note 2 J5
K2
Emergency
control device 2 1
and power
3 4
module
K7
ON
DIP switch Equipped when not in
communication K8-P10
1 2 Note 1 Y1 X23
Note 3 Emergency evacuation
signal K8-P11
M1 301
K9-1
COM
Evacuation completion
signal K9-2
DI1 M6 Y6
Equipped during
communication
K10-2
CANH CAN+
Communication
signal K10-1
CANL CAN-
K10-3
COM COM
Figure 10-9 Wiring of three-phase (380 V) ARD
Parameter setting for emergency evacuation by controller drive
Parameter Setting
No. Value
F5-23 Emergency evacuation Assume that X20 is used as the NO

27
(X23) signal (NO) input of emergency evacuation signal.
Parameter setting for emergency evacuation by shorting stator braking
Parameter Setting
No. Value
0: Motor
Emergency evacuation
F8-10 not -
mode selection
running
F5-23 Emergency evacuation Assume that X20 is used as the NO

27
(X23) signal (NO) input of emergency evacuation signal.
- 276 -
Additional information:
◆◆ Select an ARD with nominal output power not lower than the rated motor
power.
◆◆ For the 380 V ARD, only two phases are used for emergency evacuation
NOTE output. Therefore, ensure the correct wiring on the controller side. The
output is single-phase 380 V power supply. Ensure that the input side of
the transformer match this power.
Other parameters related to emergency evacuation:
Parameter
Setting Value Setting Range
No.
F3-22 0.100–1.300 m/s2 Acceleration rate during emergency evacuation
F6-47 0.010–0.630 m/s Emergency evacuation switching speed
F6-49 0 to F6-00 Emergency evacuation parking floor
F8-09 0.05 m/s Emergency evacuation speed at power failure
10.12 Parallel/Group Control
1 Background
The control cabinet provides parallel control of two elevators and group control of
three to eight elevators for proper allocation of elevators, thereby improving running
efficiency and saving energy.
2 Solution
① Parallel control: implemented through the CAN2 communication port.
② Group control: implemented through the MCTC-GCB-A.
10.12.1 Parallel Control
Parallel control is implemented through the CAN2 port on terminal CN4.
- 277 -
Wiring
Parallel control cables connected to CAN2 port
CN4 Elevator 1 CN4 Elevator 2
CAN 2 -
CAN 2+
CAN 2 -
CAN 2+
Control Control
cabinet cabinet
24V 24V
COM COM
Mod1+
Mod1-
CN3 Mod1+
Mod1-
CN3
CAN 1+ CAN 1+
CAN 1- CAN 1-
Elevator 1 Elevator 2
24V 24V
CAN +
CAN -
MCTC-CTB CAN + MCTC-CTB
CAN -
COM COM
CN2 CN2
24V 24V
Mod+
Mod-
MCTC-HCB Mod+ MCTC-HCB
Mod-
COM COM
CN1 CN1
Figure 10-10 Wiring of parallel control (through CN4)
Before using the elevators in parallel control, set the offset floor (F6-50 ≠ 0).
User floor: the actual floor of the building
Physical floor: the floor which any elevator stops at and provides service for, or the floor
installed with a leveling plate
For the same physical floor, the leveling plate must be installed for both elevators.
Even if one elevator does not need to stop at a certain floor, one leveling plate must be
installed at this floor. You can set the service floors of this elevator so that it does not
stop at this floor.
Set the HCB addresses for each elevator according to its physical floors. The physical
floors of different elevators may be inconsistent.
Set the top floor (F6-00) and bottom floor (F6-01) of each elevator based on actual
physical floors.
- 278 -
Related parameters
Parameter Parameter Setting Setting in Parallel

Remarks
No. Name Range Control
Number of
elevators
F6-07 1–8 2 -
in group
control
Master elevator:
Elevator Elevator 1
F6-08 1–8 -
No. Slave elevator:
Elevator 2
Bit3 = 1:
Set Bit3 to 1 when the
Parallel/Group
Program CAN2 communication
F6-09 - control implemented
selection port on terminal CN4 is
through the CAN2
used for parallel control.
communication port
Example: parallel control of two elevators
Elevator 1 has one underground user floor and four above-ground user floors, but it
stops only at floors B1, 1, 2, and 3.
Elevator 2 has four above-ground user floors, but it stops only at floors 1, 3, and 4.
The following figure shows the floors of the two elevators.
Floor 4 5 Floor 4 Physical floor 5

Floor 4 User floor
Leveling plate 4 4
Floor 3 Floor 3 Physical floor 4
5 HCB address
Floor 2 3 Floor 2 Physical floor 3

(Not stop)
2 2
Floor 1 Floor 1 Physical floor 2
1 Elevator 2
Floor B1 Physical floor 1
Elevator 1
Figure 10-11 Floors of elevators in parallel control
- 279 -
Corresponding parameter settings are as follows.
Table 10-2 Floor address setting for elevators in parallel control
Elevator 1 Elevator 2
Number of elevators
in group control (F6- 2 2
07)
Elevator No. (F6-08) 1 2
User Physical HCB

HCB display HCB address HCB display
floor floor address
B1 1 1 FE-01 = 1101 1 FE-01 = 1901
Non-stop floor
No hall call
1 2 2 FE-02 = 1901 -
Leveling plate
required
2 3 3 FE-03 = 1902 3 FE-03 = 1903
3 4 4 FE-04 = 1903 4 FE-04 = 1904
No hall
4 5 No hall call - -
call
Bottom floor of the

1 1
elevator (F6-01)
Top floor of the

4 4
elevator (F6-00)
65533 (does not stop at physical floor

Service floors (F6-05) 65535
2)
Offset floor (F6-50) 0 1
10.12.2 Group Control
Collaborating with the GCB (MCTC-GCB-A), the control cabinet can implement the group
control of three or more elevators.
One GCB supports group control of up to four elevators.
If group control involves more than four elevators, two GCBs are required. This situation
is not introduced here. Contact Inovance for customization if required.
- 280 -
Wiring
DC 24V +
DC 24V -
COM 24V
CN2 CN3
D5
D37
D3
D40
D2
D41
MCTC-GCB-A
D42
D43
D44
D45
D46
D47
CN7 CN9 CN8 CN

CAN1 CAN1 CAN2 CAN2 CAN3 CAN3 CAN4 CAN4
24V ＋－ COM 24V ＋－ COM 24V ＋－ COM 24V ＋－ COM
CAN2+ CAN2- CAN2+ CAN2- CAN2+ CAN2- CAN2+ CAN2-
MCB 1 MCB 2 MCB 3 MCB 4

CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN
CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN CAN

CTB 1 CTB 2 CTB 3 CTB 4
Elevator 1 Elevator 2 Elevator 3 Elevator 4
Figure 10-12 Wiring of group control
Related parameters
Parameter Parameter Setting Setting in Group

Remarks
Number of Actual number of

F6-07 elevators in 1–8 1–8 elevators under group
group control control
1: Elevator 1
2: Elevator 2
F6-08 Elevator No. 1–8 1–8
3: Elevator 3
4: Elevator 4
- 281 -
Parameter Parameter Setting Setting in Group

Remarks
Bit1 = 0:
MCTC-GCB-A is Sets based on the GCB
-
used for group model.
control.
Program Bit4 = 1:
F6-60 Set Bit4 to 1 when the
selection The GCB and
control cabinet works
control cabinet
- together with the GCB
are used together
to implement group
to implement
control.
group control.
10.13 Through-type Door Solution
1 Background
Through-type door solution is applied when separate control on two doors of an

elevator is required.
2 Solution
The control cabinet supports four through-type door control modes: mode 1, mode 2,
mode 3, and mode 4, as described in the following table.
Table 10-3 Through-type door control modes
Type Door Control Mode Function Description
Simultaneous control of the The front and rear doors open simultaneously
Mode 1
front and rear doors upon arrival for any calls.
Hall call: The front door opens upon arrival for

hall calls from the front door, and the rear door
Door open on one side for
opens upon arrival for hall calls from the rear
Mode 2 hall calls, and door open on
door.
both sides for car calls
Car call: The front and rear doors open
simultaneously upon arrival for car calls.
- 282 -
Type Door Control Mode Function Description

door.
Mode 3 hall calls, and manual door
Car call: Upon arrival for car calls, the door open
open control for car calls
mode is controlled by the switch in the car.
Two open modes are available: only the front
door opens and only the rear door opens.

Mode 4 door.
both hall calls and car calls
Car call: The front door opens upon arrival for car
calls from the front door, and the rear door opens
upon arrival for car calls from the rear door.
Wiring
① CCB wiring
MCTC-CTB-A
CN7 CN8
MCTC-
CCB-A
Front door Control Control Rear door
Single COP
- 283 -
MCTC-CTB-A
CN7 CN8
control Control rear door
MCTC-
CCB-A
MCTC-
Front door Front COP CCB-A Rear door
Control front control

door Rear COP
Figure 10-13 CCB wiring
② HCB setting
Control cabinet
24V COM MOD+ MOD-

CN3
HCBs of front door HCBs of rear door
Address: 20 Address: N+20 Floor 20
Address: X Address: N+X Floor X
Address: 1 Address: N Floor 1
Figure 10-14 HCB address setting 1
HCB addresses of the front door: 1 to 20

HCB addresses of the rear door: N to N+20
F8-16 = N (N > F6-00)
- 284 -
Related parameters
Parameter Setting HCB

Door Control Service
Type Mode Other Wiring of CCB Address
Mode Floor
Selection Parameters Setting
Simultaneous
FB-00 = 2
control of the
Mode 1 FC-04 = 0 F8-16 = N 20
front and rear
(N > F6-00)
doors
Door open on
one side for The CCB of the HCB
hall calls, and Same as front door is addresses
Mode 2 FC-04 = 1 20
door open on mode 1 connected to of the front
both sides for COB1 on the door: 1 to
car calls CTB. 20
Door open on The CCB of the HCB
one side for rear door is addresses
FC-04 = 2
hall calls, and Same as connected to of the rear
Mode 3 Bit4 of F6- 20
manual door mode 1 COB2 on the door: N to
40 = 1
open control CTB. N+20
for car calls
Door open on
one side for Same as
Mode 4 FC-04 = 3 20
both hall calls mode 1
and car calls
Note:
In mode 3, the car door to open is controlled as follows:
① Control by button
Connect the button to terminal JP16 on the COB, and set Bit2 of F6-40 (Program control
selection 1) to 1. When this button is steady ON, only the front door opens. When this button
is steady OFF, only the rear door opens.
② Control by switch
Connect the switch to terminal JP20 on the COB, and set Bit15 of F6-40 (Program control
selection 1) to 1. When JP20 is ON, only the front door opens. When JP20 is OFF, only the
rear door opens.
- 285 -
11 Appendix
11 Appendix
11.1 Electrical Schematic Diagrams

Visit Inovance's official website (www.inovance.com) to download the Electrical
Schematic Diagrams of Tomorrow Series Integrated Elevator Control Cabinet .
11.2 Warranty Agreement

1) Inovance provides an 18-month free warranty to the equipment itself from the date
of manufacturing for the failure or damage under normal use conditions.
2) Within the warranty period, maintenance will be charged for the damage caused by
the following reasons:
a. Improper use or repair/modification without prior permission
b. Fire, flood, abnormal voltage, natural disasters and secondary disasters
c. Hardware damage caused by dropping or transportation after procurement
d. Operations not following the user instructions
e. Damage out of the equipment (for example, external device factors)
3) The maintenance fee is charged according to the latest Maintenance Price List of
Inovance.
4) If there is any problem during the service, contact Inovance’s agent or Inovance
directly.
5) Inovance reserves the rights for explanation of this agreement.
- 286 -
Suzhou Inovance Technology Co., Ltd.
Add.: No. 16 Youxiang Road, Yuexi Town, Wuzhong District, Suzhou 215104, P.R. China
Tel: +86-512-6637 6666
Fax: +86-512-6285 6720
http://www.inovance.com
Shenzhen Inovance Technology Co., Ltd.

Add.: Building E, Hongwei Industry Park, Liuxian Road, Baocheng No. 70 Zone, Bao'an District, Shenzhen
Tel: +86-755-2979 9595
Fax: +86-755-2961 9897
*19011423A00*
19011423A00
http://www.inovance.com Copyright © Shenzhen Inovance Technology Co., Ltd.

Monarch Wise3000

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

Monarch Wise3000

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

User Guide

Integrated Elevator Control Cabinet

This product is a new generation of elevator control cabinet independently designed

1.1 Model Number and Nameplate............................................................................. 21

1.2 Layout of Components.......................................................................................... 22

1.4 Technical Data........................................................................................................ 26

1.5 Electrical Specifications......................................................................................... 29

1.6 Introduction to Major Components...................................................................... 29

1.6.1 Braking Resistor......................................................................................... 29

1.6.2 WISE3000-U Series Power Module............................................................ 30

1.6.3 Main Control Board.................................................................................... 31

1.6.4 ADO Board.................................................................................................. 32

1.6.6 Brake Power Supply Board........................................................................ 39

1.6.7 Electric Brake Release Device.................................................................... 40

2.1 Preparations for Installation.................................................................................. 43

2.1.1 Installation Environment Requirements.................................................. 43

2.1.2 Installation Space Requirements.............................................................. 43

2.2 Installation Guidance............................................................................................. 45

2.2.1 MR Control Cabinet.................................................................................... 45

2.2.2 MRL Control Cabinet.................................................................................. 46

2.2.3 Installing the Braking Resistor Box........................................................... 47

2.2.4 Installing the Intercom............................................................................... 50

2.2.5 Joining the MR Control Cabinet and the MRL Module............................ 51

2.2.6 Installing Slow-Down Switches................................................................. 52

3.1 External Interfaces in the Control Cabinet............................................................ 54

3.1.1 Locations of External Interfaces................................................................ 55

3.1.2 Main Circuit Terminals............................................................................... 56

3.1.3 Control Signal Terminals........................................................................... 58

3.1.4 MCB Terminals............................................................................................ 60

3.1.5 Grounding System...................................................................................... 69

3.1.6 PG Card Wiring............................................................................................ 70

3.2 Wiring of External Interfaces.................................................................................. 72

3.3 Recommended Peripherals................................................................................... 73

3.4 Major Electrical Circuits......................................................................................... 73

3.4.1 Main Circuit................................................................................................. 73

3.4.2 Safety and Door Lock Circuits................................................................... 74

3.4.3 Inspection and EEO Circuits...................................................................... 75

3.4.4 Bypass Circuit............................................................................................. 76

3.4.5 Brake Circuit............................................................................................... 77

3.4.6 ARD Circuit.................................................................................................. 78

3.4.7 Leveling Signal System Circuit.................................................................. 78

3.5 Overall System Wiring............................................................................................ 79

4.2 LED Operating Panel.............................................................................................. 82

4.2.3 Data Display................................................................................................ 84

4.2.4 Basic Operations........................................................................................ 84

5.1 Trial Run Commissioning Flowchart..................................................................... 86

5.2 Safety and Circuit Inspections............................................................................... 86

5.3 Power-on and Controller State Confirmation...................................................... 89

5.3.1 Checking the Power-on State.................................................................... 89

5.3.2 Checking the Controller State at Normal Power-on................................ 89

5.3.3 Possible Controller States and Troubleshooting Before Commissioning.90

5.4 Commissioning at Inspection Speed.................................................................... 91

5.4.1 Motor Auto-Tuning..................................................................................... 93

5.4.2 Running Test at Inspection Speed.......................................................... 101

5.5 Shaft Auto-Tuning................................................................................................. 103

5.6 Function Commissioning..................................................................................... 106

5.6.1 UCMP Function......................................................................................... 106

5.6.2 Braking Force Detection.......................................................................... 108

6 Parameter Description................................................................................................... 111

6.1 Keypad Parameters.............................................................................................. 111

6.2 Operating Panel Parameters................................................................................ 115

6.3 Parameter Groups................................................................................................ 115

6.4 Parameter Table................................................................................................... 116

Group F0: Basic parameters............................................................................. 116